JP7475880B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, a winning/losing lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game can be played when a game ball enters a start winning hole provided in the game area, and a special symbol indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery is determined, and the special symbol is displayed to vary, and a jackpot symbol is displayed to indicate that the result of the winning/losing lottery is that the special game will be played (a jackpot win), and a special game in which many prize balls can be won is played. In such gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the gaming profit given to the player is generally set to be different depending on the type of jackpot symbol determined. For example, a gaming machine is known in which a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter a specified start winning hole, and a time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter a specified start winning hole are provided as gaming states, and when a specific jackpot symbol is determined, the gaming state after the special game is ended is set to the time-saving gaming state (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2015-107139 A JP 2008-253554 A

However, in gaming machines like those described above, the game state that is set after the special game is played is associated with the type of jackpot symbol, and the non-time-saving game state cannot be changed to the time-saving game state without deciding to play the special game (winning the jackpot) and playing the special game. Therefore, there are significant restrictions on changing to a different game state, making it difficult to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and creating the problem of being unable to provide novel gameplay that can heighten the player's interest.

Therefore, the present invention was made in light of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can provide innovative gameplay that can increase the interest of players.

To achieve the above-mentioned objectives, the present invention is configured as follows.

(1) The present invention provides a gaming machine that includes a storage means capable of storing lottery information obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into a first area or a second area into which the gaming ball can enter, a determination means capable of determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player can be executed based on the lottery information, a pattern determination means capable of determining a pattern associated with the result of the determination, and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a non-time-saving game state in which a game progresses mainly based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first area and the frequency of determination by the determination means is relatively low, and a time-saving game state in which a game progresses mainly based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second area and the frequency of determination is relatively high, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the time-saving game state when a specific pattern associated with not executing the special game is determined, and the specific pattern that can be determined by the pattern determination means includes a non-time-saving game state and a time-saving game state. The time-shortened game state includes a small win pattern associated with the execution of a different small win game, and when the small win pattern is determined during the time-shortened game state, it is possible to end the time-shortened game state, and when the small win pattern is determined, the time-shortened game state ends before the small win game based on the determination starts, and when a specific condition is satisfied after the execution of a small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern by lottery information stored based on the entry of a game ball into the second area, the time-shortened game state can be set , and when the lottery information for making a decision not to execute the special game associated with the specific pattern is stored in the storage means, a notification related to the decision can be executed before the result of the decision based on the lottery information by the decision means is obtained, and the execution time of the notification differs depending on the specific pattern .
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a specific symbol associated with not executing a special game advantageous to the player is determined, the game proceeds mainly based on the entry of the game ball into the first area, and a time-saving game state is set in which the frequency of determination of whether or not to execute the special game (frequency of determination by the determination means) is relatively high. Therefore, since the time-saving game state can be set without the decision to execute the special game and the execution of the special game, it becomes possible to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and it becomes possible to provide novel gameplay that can increase the interest of the player.
In addition, when the time-saving game state ends based on the determination of a small win symbol as a specific symbol, the time-saving game state is set if a specific condition is satisfied after the execution of a small win game based on the determination of a small win symbol by lottery information stored based on the entry of a game ball into the second area. Therefore, even if the time-saving game state ends, if lottery information for determining a specific symbol is stored during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set again, which can further increase the player's interest.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can provide innovative gameplay that can increase the interest of players.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door open. 1 is a schematic front view of a gaming board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a front schematic view of the inside of an attacker device of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a special pattern random number determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a special electric device operating table of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a game status setting table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table of a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a winning determination random number judgment table for a pachinko machine. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of the second start winning hole opening control table of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a sensor is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a gate is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when the first start winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when the second start winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a pre-determination process in a main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a specific area is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of special chart-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special pattern variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a flowchart showing an outline of the win/loss determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variation pattern determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special pattern variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the small win game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game ending processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a flowchart showing an outline of the general map-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing after a normal symbol stops in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the movable piece control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the variable presentation of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a variable presentation determination table for a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the execution rate of the preview effects of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the execution rate of the look-ahead performance of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of a special notification effect of a pachinko machine. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the change effects and special notification effects of a pachinko machine. 1 is a time chart showing the progress of the change effects and special notification effects of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variable pattern command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a win/lose random number determination table for a pachinko machine relating to modified example (2). An explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table of a pachinko machine relating to modified example (36). An explanatory diagram of a variation pattern table of a pachinko machine relating to modified example (36). A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 3. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 3. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 4. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 4. 13 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 5. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 5. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 5. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 6. A state transition diagram showing the transition to each game state of a pachinko machine relating to another application example 6. A figure showing an example of the type of presentation executed after a pachinko machine relating to another application example 6 transitions to a second low probability game state.

(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses gaming balls as a gaming medium. Although not shown in the figure, in an amusement parlor where the pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an area where the gaming machines are installed, called an island, and a gaming ball lending device for lending the gaming balls is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding gaming ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R can accept the insertion of bills and a storage medium (card) that stores value information required for lending game balls. After inserting bills (or a card) into the game ball lending device R, a player can receive game balls from the game ball lending device R by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment comprises a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame body fixed to an island and has a hollow portion (not shown), a main body frame 2, which is a rectangular frame body attached to the machine frame 1 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be freely opened and closed, and has a hollow portion (not shown), and a front door 3, which is attached to the main body frame 2 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be freely opened and closed, and has an opening (not shown) formed on the front.

As shown in Figure 1, a speaker serving as a sound output device 10 is provided in the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. A game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is housed in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 is provided with a transparent plate 4 covering the opening, an upper tray 6 and a receiving tray 7 located below the transparent plate 4 and capable of receiving game balls, an operating handle 5 attached to the right of the receiving tray 7 for operating the launch of game balls, and two speakers serving as sound output devices 10 attached to the upper left and right portions of the transparent plate 4.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main frame 2 is closed against the machine casing 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap between them. This makes it possible to view the game board 11 located at the rear through the transparent plate 4.

In addition, the upper tray 6 is adapted to guide game balls dispensed by the game ball dispenser R and prize balls dispensed from the pachinko machine P. The upper tray 6 is adapted to receive a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is filled with game balls, the game balls dispensed or dispensed thereafter are guided to the receiving tray 7. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the bottom surface of the receiving tray 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. Normally, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see FIG. 1) attached integrally to the opening/closing plate in the horizontal direction, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, opening the discharge hole. This allows the game balls to fall through the discharge hole and be discharged out of the receiving tray 7.

The operating handle 5 is also formed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. When the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game balls held in the upper tray 6 are sent to a launching device (not specifically shown), and the launching device launches the game balls toward the play area 12 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. The game balls launched in this manner are guided upward by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and reach the play area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is a portion of the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main frame 2 and the front door 3 are closed to the machine frame 1, which is partitioned into an approximately circular shape by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and is an area through which game balls can flow down.
As shown in Fig. 3, the game area 12 is composed of a first game area 12a, which is an area on the left side as seen by a player facing the pachinko machine P, and a second game area 12b, which is an area on the right side as seen by a player facing the pachinko machine P. The two game areas 12 have different possibilities for game balls to enter depending on the firing strength of the launching device. Specifically, when the firing strength of the launching device is less than a predetermined strength (a strength at which the game ball launched by the launching device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the first game area 12a. On the other hand, when the firing strength of the launching device is equal to or greater than a predetermined strength (a strength at which the game ball launched by the launching device can reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the second game area 12b.

Also, within this game area 12, as shown in Figure 3, there are provided a windmill and numerous nails for making the direction in which game balls flow irregularly, a general winning opening 14 through which game balls can enter, a first starting winning opening 15 and a second starting winning opening 16 as starting areas, a gate 20 through which game balls can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is met, an outlet 19 that guides game balls out of the game area 12, and a performance display device 21 that acts as a performance device that performs performances as the game progresses. Note that Figure 3 shows only some of the nails, and the other nails are omitted.

As shown in Figure 3, the general winning opening 14 is located slightly to the left of the center at the bottom of the game area 12, and when a game ball enters the general winning opening 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (five in this embodiment) are paid out.
The number and locations of the general winning ports 14 are not particularly limited.

The first start winning opening 15 is located slightly below the center of the play area 12 as shown in FIG. 3, and the second start winning opening 16 is located slightly above the center of the right part of the play area 12 as shown in FIG. 3. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only game balls flowing down the first play area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15, and game balls flowing down the second play area 12b cannot enter. In addition, only game balls flowing down the second play area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16, and game balls flowing down the first play area 12a cannot enter.

3, the second start winning opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (normal electric device) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second start winning opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second start winning opening 16 is in an open state, and the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second start winning opening 16, thereby making it possible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Furthermore, the configuration of this movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may be configured, for example, by a pair of blade members that rotate left and right around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or a cover member that rotates back and forth around an axis horizontal to the game board 11 to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or it may be configured by a shutter member that slides up and down to open and close the second start winning opening 16.
In addition, the installation locations of the first start winning port 15 and the second start winning port 16 are not particularly limited, and for example, the first start winning port 15 and the second start winning port 16 may be placed in a position where game balls flowing down either game area 12 (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) can easily enter the port.

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a winning/losing lottery is held to determine whether or not a big win (to be described later) has been won (hereinafter also referred to as winning/losing a big win), whether or not a small win (to be described later) has been won (hereinafter also referred to as winning/losing a small win), and whether or not a time-saving game state (to be described later) has been granted (hereinafter also referred to as granting a time-saving game state), and one special symbol is selected from a number of special symbols determined in advance according to the result of the winning/losing lottery. There are a number of types of special symbols that can be selected, and depending on the type of special symbol selected, a game benefit such as execution of a special game advantageous to the player, execution of a small win game, granting of a time-saving game state (setting of a first time-saving game state described later), etc. is granted.
The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and may be any number. Also, the number of prize balls may be the same or different between the start winning hole (second start winning hole 16) with the movable piece 16b and the start winning hole (first start winning hole 15) without the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15 is four, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16 is one.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gate 20 is provided above the second start winning opening 16. When a game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the movable piece 16b provided in the second start winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the attacker device 17 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 12 (below the second start winning hole 16). The attacker device 17 includes a large winning hole 18 into which a game ball can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b for opening and closing the large winning hole 18. Normally, the opening/closing door 18b is closed and the large winning hole 18 is closed, so that a game ball cannot enter the large winning hole 18. However, when the special game or the small winning game is executed, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the large winning hole 18 is opened, so that a game ball can enter the large winning hole 18. Specifically, during the special game, a round game in which the large winning hole 18 is opened is executed multiple times, and during the small winning game, the large winning hole 18 is opened once. When one game ball enters the big prize opening 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this embodiment) are paid out.
3, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the large prize opening 18, but game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the large prize opening 18. Although not shown, nails, windmills, etc. are arranged so that almost all game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can reach the large prize opening 18, except for those that enter the second start prize opening 16. Therefore, as long as game balls continue to be shot out as long as the large prize opening 18 is open, the game balls will enter the large prize opening 18.

Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 4(a) and (b), a rolling path 51 is provided inside the attacker device 17 along which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can roll to the left. This rolling path 51 branches into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, and at the end of the upper passage 52 is provided a general area 58 into which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can enter, while at the end of the lower passage 53 is provided a specific area 57 into which a gaming ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can enter (see Figs. 4(a) and (b)).

4(a) and (b), a distribution member 59 that distributes game balls to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53 is provided at the branching point of the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53. The distribution member 59 is rotatable about an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 and can be displaced between a first position that opens the path to the upper passage 52 and blocks the path to the lower passage 53, and a second position that blocks the path to the upper passage 52 and opens the path to the lower passage 53. When the distribution member 59 is in the first position, the game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 advances to the upper passage 52 and enters the general area 58, and when the distribution member 59 is in the second position, the game ball advances to the lower passage 53 and enters the specific area 57.

Although not specifically shown, the attacker device 17 is provided with a specific area outlet for discharging game balls that have entered the specific area 57 outside the big prize opening 18 (on the rear side of the game board 11), and a general area outlet for discharging game balls that have entered the general area 58 outside the big prize opening 18 (on the rear side of the game board 11).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the manner in which the opening and closing door 18b opens and closes (opening and closing pattern) and the manner in which the distribution member 59 operates (operation pattern) in the round game executed during the above-mentioned special game are set for each type of special pattern determined when a jackpot is won.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a predetermined number of game balls (one in this embodiment) enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play, the game state after the special game ends is set to a game state that combines a high probability game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and a time-saving game state. On the other hand, when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play (i.e., when all game balls that entered the big prize opening 18 enter the general area 58), the game state after the special game ends is set to a game state (normal game state) that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state.
The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b, the operation pattern of the sorting member 59, and the game state settings will be described in detail later.
As described above, the game state after the end of the special game may not be set to a high probability game state or a time-saving game state when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in a round game during the special game, but may be set to a high probability game state or a time-saving game state according to the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won. For example, when a jackpot is won and a specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a game state (high probability time-saving game state) that combines a high probability game state and a time-saving game state, but when a special symbol other than the specific special symbol is determined, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a game state (normal game state) that combines a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. In this way, when the game state after the end of the special game is determined according to the type of special symbol, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned specific area 57.

As shown in FIG. 3, the outlet 19 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12 and receives game balls that have not entered any of the general winning opening 14, the first start winning opening 15, the second start winning opening 16, and the big winning opening 18. Game balls received in the outlet 19 are guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in Fig. 3, the performance display device 21 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the performance display device 21. The performance display device 21 is provided with a display section 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images, and in addition to displaying a background image on the display section 21a, performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and a variable performance is performed to notify the player of the result of the winning/losing lottery depending on the stop display mode of each performance symbol 50.
In addition, the performance display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be, for example, a drum-type display device that uses multiple drums with patterns on the outer circumference to display various types of information.

The pachinko machine P in this embodiment is equipped with, as a performance device, in addition to the performance display device 21, a speaker as the above-mentioned audio output device 10, and a lamp (see Figure 1) as a performance lighting device 23 that produces performance by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns.
It should be noted that the presentation devices are not limited to these, and may include, for example, prop devices that can move at various times and in various ways.

In addition, a performance operation device 9 is provided in front of the upper tray 6, which can be operated by the player to progress or switch the performance executed during play or standby. In this embodiment, the performance operation device 9 is composed of an operation dial 9a that is a circular ring-shaped frame body that can be rotated, and an operation button 9b that is fitted into the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. When a specific performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, rotating the operation dial 9a or pressing the operation button 9b causes various performances such as variable performances to progress or to switch to a different display.
The performance operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, but may be a cross key capable of inputting up, down, left and right directions. In addition to providing the performance operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, the above-mentioned cross key may be provided separately.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the lower right portion of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, a first special symbol display device 30, a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol reserved display device 38, a second special symbol reserved display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol reserved display device 33 are provided as devices for displaying various game statuses.

As described above, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is electrically connected to the game ball lending device R, and the pachinko machine P is configured to accept operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending game balls and ejecting cards. For this reason, the pachinko machine P is provided with a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a card return button 37 that can be pressed, as shown in FIG. 1.

(Configuration of the control means of the pachinko machine P)
Next, the control means for controlling the game and presentation of the pachinko machine P will be described.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards, and specifically, as shown in Figure 5, it includes a main control board 100 that controls the basic operations of the pachinko machine P, a launch and payout control board 200 that controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, a sub-control board 300 that controls various presentations, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

5, the main control board 100 is connected to a launching/payout control board 200 and a sub-control board 300, and the launching/payout control board 200 is connected to a game ball lending control board 400. Furthermore, the main control board 100 and the launching/payout control board 200 are connected to an external information terminal board 500 for outputting various information on the progress of the game to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in the game center).
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the launch and payout control board 200 controls both the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, but a board that controls the launch of game balls (launch control board) and a board that controls the payout of prize balls (payout control board) may be provided separately.

Although not specifically shown, a power supply board is connected to each board equipped in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment. This power supply board is provided with a backup power supply, and when the voltage value of the power supplied to the pachinko machine P falls below a predetermined value, it determines that a power cut has occurred and outputs a power cut signal to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 controls the games played on the pachinko machine P, and specifically controls the special game (lottery for winning or losing, determination of special patterns, and display of changing special patterns (hereinafter also referred to as special pattern changes)) which is started when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, the regular game (lottery for regular patterns, display of changing regular patterns (hereinafter also referred to as regular pattern changes), etc.) which is started when the game ball passes through the gate 20, special games that are advantageous to the player, small win games, etc.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 is equipped with a main CPU 101 which performs various calculation processes, a main ROM 102 which stores a control program for progressing the game and data and tables necessary for the game, and a main RAM 103 which is used as a temporary storage area during calculation processes.
Then, based on signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, the main CPU 101 reads out a control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs calculation processing, as well as controlling various devices connected to the main CPU 101 and sending commands to other boards based on the results of the calculation processing.

5, the main control board 100 is connected to a general winning opening detection sensor 14a that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 14, a first start winning opening detection sensor 15a that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 15, a second start winning opening detection sensor 16a that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16, a large winning opening detection sensor 18a that detects the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 18, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects the passage of a game ball through a gate 20, a fraud detection sensor 35 that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed toward the game board 11, and a specific area detection sensor 57a that detects the entry of a game ball into a specific area 57. The detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
It should be noted that the sensors connected to the main control board 100 are not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor that detects when a gaming ball enters the general area 58 may be provided.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected to the following devices to be controlled: a start winning port solenoid 16c which drives the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 to open and close; a large winning port solenoid 18c which drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 to open and close; a distribution member solenoid 59c which displaces the distribution member 59; a first special pattern display device 30; a second special pattern display device 31; a normal pattern display device 32; a first special pattern reserve display device 38; a second special pattern reserve display device 39; and a normal pattern reserve display device 33.
The main control board 100 drives each solenoid to control the opening and closing of the second start winning port 16 and the large winning port 18, as well as control the displacement of the sorting member 59, and also controls the display of each display device.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages from setting value 1 to setting value 6 are set as the setting for the ball output, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery described later differs depending on the difference in the setting value. For example, setting value 6 is set to have a higher probability of winning the jackpot than setting value 1, and if the probability of winning the jackpot is high, the possibility of winning prize balls also increases, so by changing the setting value, the expected payout amount of prize balls in the pachinko machine P changes. In addition, the win/lose random number judgment table 110 used in the win/lose lottery described later is provided corresponding to each of the setting values 1 to 6, and when the setting value is changed, the win/lose random number judgment table 110 provided for each setting value is changed in its entirety.
Although not shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch and a setting switch used to change the above-mentioned setting values. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the front door 3 is open and the power is turned on with both the RAM clear switch and the setting switch turned on, the machine transitions to a setting change state in which the setting values can be changed. In this setting change state, the setting values can be changed by operating the RAM clear switch.

The firing and dispensing control board 200, although not specifically shown, is equipped with a CPU, ROM, and RAM, just like the main control board 100, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

As shown in FIG. 5, the launch/payout control board 200 is connected with the following devices for controlling the launch of game balls: a touch sensor 5a that detects when the player touches the operating handle 5; an operating volume 5b that detects the operating angle (rotation angle) of the operating handle 5; a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls; a ball feed solenoid 60 that sends the game balls held in the upper tray 6 to a launch device (not shown); and a launch motor 61 that launches the game balls. In addition, control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operating volume 5b, and the launch stop switch 5c are input to the launch/payout control board 200.

When the control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the launching and dispensing control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized to control the launching of game balls. Also, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are energized, the game balls are continuously launched at 0.6 second intervals (i.e., at a rate of 100 balls per minute). On the other hand, when the control signal from the launch stop switch 5c is input to the launching and dispensing control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are de-energized to stop the launching of game balls.
In addition, a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the launch motor 61 as a device for launching the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 5, the launch payout control board 200 is connected to a payout motor 62 that pays out the game balls stored in a game ball storage section (not shown) as prize balls, and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid-out game balls, as devices for controlling the payout of game balls. When the launch payout control board 200 receives a payout number command sent from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 controls the payout motor 62 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the payout number command. At this time, the number of paid-out game balls is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether the predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the firing/dispensing control board 200 is connected to a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open state of the front door 3, and a tray full detection sensor 7a that detects the full state of the tray 7.

When the front door open detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, it outputs an open detection signal to the launch/dispense control board 200, and the open detection signal is output continuously while the front door 3 is open. When the open detection signal is input, the launch/dispense control board 200 sends a door open command to the main control board 100. In response, when the front door open detection sensor 3a no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, it turns off and stops outputting the door open detection signal. When the input of the door open detection signal stops, the launch/dispense control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops sending the door open command to the main control board 100.

The tray full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position of the tray 7. When the tray 7 is filled with a predetermined amount of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, the stored game balls reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The tray full detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a tray detection signal to the launch/dispatch control board 200. The tray detection signal is continuously output while the stored game balls are at the above-mentioned predetermined position. When the tray detection signal is input, the launch/dispatch control board 200 transmits a tray full command to the main control board 100. In response to this, the tray full detection sensor 7a turns off when it no longer detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and stops outputting the tray detection signal. When the input of the tray detection signal stops, the launch/dispatch control board 200 determines that the tray 7 full state has been released, and stops sending the tray full command to the main control board 100.

As described above, the launching and dispensing control board 200 is connected to a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R. As shown in FIG. 5, the launching and dispensing control board 200 is connected, via the game ball lending control board 400, to a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return switch 37a that detects the pressing operation of the card return button 37.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the launching and paying out control board 200, which then transmits a lending request signal requesting the lending of game balls to the game ball lending device R. When the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R subtracts predetermined value information from the stored value information and controls the paying out of a number of game balls corresponding to the subtracted value information.
When the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch/payout control board 200, which then transmits a return request signal requesting the return of the card to the game ball lending device R. When the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, it controls the game ball lending device R to dispense the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls the presentation that is executed during play, standby, etc.
As shown in Figure 5, this sub-control board 300 is equipped with a sub-CPU 301 which performs various types of calculation processing, a sub-ROM 302 which stores control programs for executing performances, data and tables necessary for executing performances, etc., and a sub-RAM 303 which is used as a temporary storage area during calculation processing, and is connected so as to enable one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
Then, based on commands sent from the main control board 100 and signals from a timer, the sub-CPU 301 reads out the control program stored in the sub-ROM 302 and performs calculations, and sends commands for executing performances to an image control board (not specifically shown) for controlling image display, an audio control board (not specifically shown) for controlling audio output, and an illumination control board (not specifically shown) for controlling the lighting.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the illumination control board are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide a single board (audio and illumination control board) that combines the functions of these boards, and to use this board to control both the audio output and the lighting.

The sub-control board 300 is also connected to the performance display device 21 via an image control board, and to the audio output device 10 via an audio control board. The sub-control board 300 is also connected to the performance lighting device 23 via an illumination control board, a rotation operation detection sensor 9c that detects the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, and a press operation detection sensor 9d that detects the press operation of the operation button 9b.

The image control board is equipped with an image CPU, image ROM, image RAM, etc., although not specifically shown. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as the performance pattern 50 and background displayed on the performance display device 21. Then, based on commands sent from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls the image display by the performance display device 21 by storing image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

The audio control board is equipped with a sound chip (CPU), sound ROM, sound RAM, etc., although not specifically shown. The sound ROM stores sound data such as the voice and background music output from the audio output device 10. Based on a command sent from the sub-control board 300, the sound data read from the sound ROM is stored in the sound RAM, thereby controlling the audio output from the audio output device 10.

The illumination control board controls the illumination by the illumination device 23 based on commands from the sub-control board 300. In addition, when the illumination control board receives a rotation detection signal output from the rotation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation of the operation dial 9a, or a press detection signal output from the press detection sensor 9d based on the press of the operation button 9b, the illumination control board transmits a specified command to the sub-control board 300.

(Overview of Pachinko Machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be described based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special game and the normal game proceed in parallel. In addition, as the game state when these two games proceed, either a low probability game state (so-called non-variable state) or a high probability game state (so-called variable state) is set as a game state that combines either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, two time-saving game states, a first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state, are provided as time-saving game states, and either time-saving game state is set.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, one of the following game states is set: a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the normal game state), a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the first low-probability time-saving game state), a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the second low-probability time-saving game state), or a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the high-probability time-saving game state).

The low-probability game state and the high-probability game state are game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot through a win/lose lottery, which will be described later, is set to be different, and in the high-probability game state, the probability of winning a jackpot through a win/lose lottery is set to a higher value than in the low-probability game state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through a win/lose lottery in the high-probability game state than in the low-probability game state.

In addition, the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are game states in which the difficulty of getting a game ball into the second start winning hole 16 is set differently, and in the time-saving game state, it is set so that the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in the open state (i.e., the second start winning hole 16 is more likely to be in the open state) than in the non-time-saving game state. In other words, it is easier for a game ball to get into the second start winning hole 16 during the time-saving game state than during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, two time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, are provided, and in the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is set to be more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the first time-saving game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning hole 16 during the second time-saving game state, next, the game ball is most likely to enter the second start winning hole 16 during the first time-saving game state, and the game ball is most unlikely to enter the second start winning hole 16 during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, immediately after shipment from the factory or in the initial state after a reset, the normal game mode is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a winning/losing lottery is held, and a special symbol associated with a game profit based on the result of the winning/losing lottery is determined. In the winning/losing lottery in this embodiment, first, a judgment is made as to whether or not a big win has been won, and if a judgment result is derived that the big win has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of a big win), then a judgment is made as to whether or not a small win has been won, and if a judgment result is derived that the small win has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of a small win), then a judgment is made as to whether or not a time-saving game state is granted (whether or not a time-saving game state is granted, in other words, whether or not a time-saving game state is set), and if a judgment result is derived that the time-saving game state is not granted (hereinafter also referred to as a non-win of a time-saving game state), then a loss is determined.
Then, when the result of the lottery indicates that a jackpot has been won (i.e., when a jackpot has been won), the jackpot opening 18 is opened and a special game is played in which a game ball can be inserted into the jackpot opening 18, and the game state after the special game is completed is set to either a normal game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state. In other words, after the special game is completed, the game state transitions to either a normal game state, a second low-probability time-shortened game state, or a high-probability time-shortened game state.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned win/lose lottery results in a determination that a small prize has been won (i.e., when a small prize has been won), the large prize opening 18 is opened and a small prize game is played in which a game ball can enter the large prize opening 18. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 18 in this small prize game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. The game state after the small prize game ends remains the same as the game state before the small prize game began. In other words, when a small prize game is played, the game state does not change.

In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery indicates that the time-saving game state will be granted (hereinafter, also referred to as winning the time-saving grant), the low-probability game state is not changed and the first time-saving game state is set. In other words, when the winning/losing lottery indicates that the time-saving grant is granted, the game state is transitioned from the normal game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. In contrast, when the winning/losing lottery indicates that the time-saving grant is not granted, the game state remains the normal game state.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be given is made only in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state, and the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be given is not made in the win/loss lottery during other game states. Therefore, since the result of the determination that the time-saving award will be given is not derived during other game states, it is set so that the game state does not change without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning hole 15. Also, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the big winning hole 18.
During the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left hit) so that the game ball will enter the first start winning port 15, and during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state and special game, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit) so that the game ball will enter the large winning port 18 or pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning port 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and during special game play, a display is made on the performance display device 21 instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the second game area 12b, and during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, a display is made on the performance display device 21 instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The winning/losing lottery is conducted based on various random numbers obtained when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, and various tables stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random numbers.
Here, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment has, as random numbers related to the win/lose lottery and the determination of special patterns, a win/lose random number used to determine the result of the win/lose lottery (jackpot, small win, granting of a time-saving play state or a miss), a special pattern random number used to determine the type of special pattern, and a fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern command described later.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned winning/losing random number uses a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This winning/losing random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
The variation pattern command is for determining the pattern (variation time, mode) of the variation performance that can notify the result of the winning/losing lottery. The random numbers used to determine the variation pattern command are not limited to those described above, and other random numbers may be used in addition to the random numbers.

When a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a random number value is obtained for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random number value is stored in a reserved memory area of the main RAM 103.
This reserved memory area is composed of a first reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as first special random number) of the random number related to the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, which is obtained by the game ball entering the first start winning port 15, and a second reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as second special random number) of the random number related to the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, which is obtained by the game ball entering the second start winning port 16. Each of these reserved memory areas is composed of a total of four memory sections, from the first memory section to the fourth memory section, and can store a total of four sets of first special random numbers and a total of four sets of second special random numbers.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, the first special random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reserved memory area in order. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in a state where the first special random number is not stored in any storage section of the first reserved memory area, the first special random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the first storage section of the first reserved memory area. Also, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in a state where the first special random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reserved memory area, the first special random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the second storage section of the first reserved memory area. Also, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in a state where the first special random number is stored in the first storage section and the second storage section of the first reserved memory area, the first special random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the third storage section of the first reserved memory area. In addition, when the first special random number is stored in the first memory section to the third memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the first special random number acquired as a result of this is stored in the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area. And, when the first special random number is stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the first special random number related to this ball entry is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the second special random number is stored in order from the first storage section of the second reserved storage area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special random number described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of sets of first special random numbers stored in the first reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the first reserve number) is stored in a first reserve number counter (not specifically shown), and the number of sets of second special random numbers stored in the second reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the second reserve number) is stored in a second reserve number counter (not specifically shown).
In this specification, as described above, the storage of the first special chart random number and the second special chart random number in the reserved memory area is also referred to as "reserved" or "reserved memory", and the first reserved number and the second reserved number are simply referred to as "reserved numbers".

The pachinko machine P of this embodiment has a win/lose random number determination table 110 for determining the result of a win/lose lottery, a special pattern random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special pattern, a special electric device operation table 112 for controlling the special game that is executed when a big win is won and the small win game that is executed when a small win is won, a game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after a determination result that a time-saving game state will be granted has been derived (after a time-saving pattern that is determined to set the first time-saving game state described later has been determined) or after the special game has ended, and a fluctuation pattern table 114 for determining a fluctuation pattern command.
It should be noted that tables related to winning/losing lotteries etc. are not limited to these, and in cases where it is necessary to make other judgments or decisions based on random numbers, tables may be provided as appropriate.

The win/lose random number determination table 110 is used to determine the results of the win/lose lottery (won a big win, won a small win, won or lost the time-saving bonus), and is roughly divided into a win/lose random number determination table 110 (hereafter referred to as table A) that is referenced in a low-probability game state, and a win/lose random number determination table 110 (hereafter referred to as table B) that is referenced in a high-probability game state. Also, as shown in Figures 6 to 11, each of table A and table B has six types according to the currently set value.

Specifically, table A includes table A1 which is referenced when the set value is "1", table A2 which is referenced when the set value is "2", table A3 which is referenced when the set value is "3", table A4 which is referenced when the set value is "4", table A5 which is referenced when the set value is "5", and table A6 which is referenced when the set value is "6".
Table B includes table B1 which is referenced when the set value is "1", table B2 which is referenced when the set value is "2", table B3 which is referenced when the set value is "3", table B4 which is referenced when the set value is "4", table B5 which is referenced when the set value is "5", and table B6 which is referenced when the set value is "6".

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, one win/lose random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine P and the game state at the time when the win/lose lottery is performed, one of the above-mentioned win/lose random number determination tables 110 is selected, and the result of the win/lose lottery is determined based on the obtained win/lose random number and the selected win/lose random number determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), according to table A1, if the random number is between 1000 and 1373, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small jackpot has been won, if the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1374 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A1, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/175, the probability of winning a small jackpot is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), according to table A2, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1384, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0-999, 1385-1999, 3965-65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A2, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/170, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), according to table A3, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1396, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1397 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A3, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/165, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), according to table A4, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1408, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0-999, 1409-1999, 3965-65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A4, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/160, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), according to table A5, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1421, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small jackpot has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0-999, 1422-1999, 3965-65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A5, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/155, the probability of winning a small jackpot is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), according to table A6, if the random number is between 1000 and 1434, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, if the random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small jackpot has been won, if the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, and if the random number is any other than these (0 to 999, 1435 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in table A6, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/150, the probability of winning a small jackpot is approximately 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving bonus is approximately 1/100.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6(b), according to table B1, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1484, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1485 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B1, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/135, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), according to table B2, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1503, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1504 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B2, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/130, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), according to table B3, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1523, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1524 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B3, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/125, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), according to table B4, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1545, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1546 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B4, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/120, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), according to table B5, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1568, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1569 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B5, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/115, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), according to table B6, if the win/loss random number is between 1000 and 1594, it is determined that a big win has been won, if the win/loss random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1595 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined that a loss has been won. Therefore, in this table B6, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/110, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As described above, when comparing the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a high-probability game state and the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in a low-probability game state (for example, table A1 and table B1), which have the same associated setting values, the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the high-probability game state is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the low-probability game state.
In addition, the numerical range of the win/loss random number determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the low-probability gaming state is set to be included in the numerical range of the win/loss random number determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the high-probability gaming state, which is associated with the same set value as the win/loss random number determination table 110 (specifically, the lower limit value in the numerical range determined to be a jackpot is the same and the upper limit value is different). In other words, the win/loss random number determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the low-probability gaming state will also be determined to be a jackpot in the win/loss random number determination table 110 referenced in the high-probability gaming state, which is associated with the same set value.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the lower limit value in the numerical range of the win/lose random number that determines whether a jackpot has been won is set to be the same and the upper limit value is set to be different, but this is not limited to this, and the upper limit values may be set to be the same and the lower limit values to be different.

In addition, in both tables, the numerical range of the win/lose random number that is judged to be a small win is outside the numerical range of the win/lose random number that is judged to be a big win, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are set to be the same, so that the probability of winning a small win is set to be the same. In other words, regardless of the set value and game state (high probability game state, low probability game state), a small win is judged to be a win with the same probability.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize in a win/lose lottery based on either the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number, but this is not limited to this, and it may be set so that a small prize can be won only in a win/lose lottery based on the first special chart random number, or it may be set so that a small prize can be won only in a win/lose lottery based on the second special chart random number.

In addition, the win/lose random number determination tables 110 (Table A1, Table A2, Table A3, Table A4, Table A5, Table A6) referenced in the low probability game state all have a numerical range of win/lose random numbers that are determined to be a win for the time-saving bonus outside of the numerical range of win/lose random numbers that are determined to be a win for the jackpot, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are set to be the same, thereby setting the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be the same. Therefore, during the normal game state, regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is the same.
As described above, since the win/lose lottery in a game state other than the normal game state does not determine whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded, the win/lose random number determination table 110 (table B1, table B2, table B3, table B4, table B5, table B6) referenced in the high probability game state does not have a numerical value area for determining whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded. Therefore, during the high probability game state, it is not determined that the time-saving bonus will be awarded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the numerical ranges determined to be a winning jackpot, the numerical ranges determined to be a winning small jackpot, and the numerical ranges determined to be a winning time-saving bonus are all made up of continuous numerical ranges, but they are not limited to this and may be made up of discontinuous numerical ranges that include losing numerical values in between.

The special pattern random number determination table 111 is used to determine the type of special pattern, and as shown in Figures 12 (a) and (b), it includes a first start winning gate determination table 111a which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a first special pattern random number, and a second start winning gate determination table 111b which is referenced when a win/loss lottery is conducted using a second special pattern random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, one special symbol random number is obtained within a numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery is performed, a special symbol random number determination table 111 of either the first start winning port determination table 111a or the second start winning port determination table 111b is selected according to the start winning port into which the game ball entered, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the obtained special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) are provided as special symbols (hereafter referred to as jackpot symbols) that are determined in the event of a jackpot win, two types of small prize symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereafter referred to as small prize symbols) that are determined in the event of a small prize win, seven types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7) are provided as special symbols (hereafter referred to as time-saving symbols) that are determined in the event of a time-saving win, and two types of loss symbols (Z1, Z2) are provided as special symbols (hereafter referred to as loss symbols) that are determined in the event of a loss.

12(a), according to the first start winning port judgment table 111a, when a jackpot is won, if the special pattern random number is 0 to 1, the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, if the special pattern random number is 2 to 139, the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, and if the special pattern random number is 140 to 199, the jackpot pattern X3 is determined. That is, in this first start winning port judgment table 111a, when a jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot pattern X1 is determined is 1%, the probability that the jackpot pattern X2 is determined is 69%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern X3 is determined is 30%.
In addition, in the case of a small prize winning, the small prize symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, and the small prize symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 100 to 199. In other words, in the first start winning port judgment table 111a, in the case of a small prize winning, the probability that the small prize symbol Y1 is determined and the probability that the small prize symbol Y2 is determined are both 50%.
In addition, in the case where a time-saving bonus is awarded, if the special pattern random number is between 0 and 99, a time-saving pattern J1 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 100 and 149, a time-saving pattern J2 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 150 and 183, a time-saving pattern J3 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 184 and 193, a time-saving pattern J4 is determined, if the special pattern random number is between 194 and 197, a time-saving pattern J5 is determined, and if the special pattern random number is between 198 and 199, a time-saving pattern J6 is determined. In other words, in this first start winning port determination table 111a, when a time-saving bonus is awarded, the probability that the time-saving pattern J1 will be determined is 50%, the probability that the time-saving pattern J2 will be determined is 25%, the probability that the time-saving pattern J3 will be determined is 17%, the probability that the time-saving pattern J4 will be determined is 5%, the probability that the time-saving pattern J5 will be determined is 2%, and the probability that the time-saving pattern J6 will be determined is 1%.
In addition, in the case of a loss, the loss symbol Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is 0 to 19, and the loss symbol Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is 20 to 199. That is, in the first start winning port determination table 111a, in the case of a loss, the probability that the loss symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that the loss symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

12(b), according to the second start winning port judgment table 111b, in the event of a jackpot win, if the special pattern random number is 0 to 139, the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, and if the special pattern random number is 140 to 199, the jackpot pattern X4 is determined. That is, in this second start winning port judgment table 111b, in the event of a jackpot win, the probability that the jackpot pattern X1 is determined is 70%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern X4 is determined is 30%.
In addition, in the case where the time-saving bonus is won, the time-saving bonus J7 is determined when the special bonus random number is between 0 and 199 (i.e., regardless of the value of the special bonus random number). In other words, in the second start winning port determination table 111b, the probability that the time-saving bonus J7 is determined in the case where the time-saving bonus is won is 100%.
As shown in FIG. 12(b), the type of small win symbol that is determined in the event of a small win and the probability of determining that type, as well as the type of losing symbol that is determined in the event of a loss and the probability of determining that type, are set to the same contents as those in the first start winning port determination table 111a.

The special electric device operation table 112 is for controlling the special game to be executed when a big win is won and the small win game to be executed when a small win is won, and is referred to in order to operate the big prize opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during the execution of the special game and the small win game. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (a) to (d), the special electric device operation table 112 includes a first operation table 112a to be referenced when a big win is won and the big win pattern X1 is determined, a second operation table 112b to be referenced when a big win is won and the big win pattern X2 is determined, a third operation table 112c to be referenced when a big win is won and the big win pattern X3 or X4 is determined, and a fourth operation table 112d to be referenced when a small win is won and the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined.

Specifically, when the big win is won and the big win pattern X1 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the first operation table 112a shown in Fig. 13(a). According to this first operation table 112a, a round game that ends when either the big win opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the big win opening 18 is executed 10 times in total from round 1 to round 10. Also, during the execution of each round game, the opening and closing door 18b is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and is positioned in the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then displaced from the open position to the closed position (opening and closing pattern), so that the big win opening 18 is opened only once, and the time (i.e., the interval time) during which the big win opening 18 is closed between each round game is set to 2.0 seconds.
13(a), when the big win symbol X1 is determined, the allocating member 59 operates in such a manner (operation pattern) that it stops (is located) at the first position during each of the first, second, fourth to tenth rounds of play. In contrast, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 operates in such a manner that it stops at the second position.

In addition, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the second operation table 112b shown in Fig. 13(b). According to this second operation table 112b, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the above-mentioned first operation table 112a is executed a total of 10 times from round 1 to round 10. The opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 18b and the interval time are also set to the same contents as those of the first operation table 112a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, during each of the first, second, fourth to tenth rounds of play, the allocating member 59 operates in a manner to stop at the first position, similarly to when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, and further, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 also operates in a manner to stop at the first position.

In addition, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X3 or X4 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the third operation table 112c shown in Fig. 13(c). According to this third operation table 112c, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b is executed four times in total from round 1 to round 4. The opening and closing pattern and interval time of the opening and closing door 18b are set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b.
Also, as shown in FIG. 13(c), when the jackpot pattern X3 or X4 is determined, the allocating member 59 operates to stop at the first position during the first, second and fourth rounds of play, in the same manner as when the jackpot pattern X1 and the jackpot pattern X2 are determined, and further, during the third round of play, the allocating member 59 operates to stop at the first position, in the same manner as when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the jackpot opening 18 is opened continuously for 29.0 seconds during three rounds of play (specific round play), and the distribution member 59 is stopped at the second position, so that as long as game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b, the game balls can enter the jackpot opening 18 and a predetermined number of game balls can be reliably admitted to the specific area 57.
In contrast, when the jackpot pattern X2, X3 or X4 is determined, in three rounds of play, the large prize opening 18 is opened continuously for 29.0 seconds, but the distribution member 59 remains in the first position, so that even if a game ball enters the large prize opening 18, the game ball will all enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

In addition, when a small prize is won and the small prize symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, a small prize game is executed by referring to a fourth operation table 112d shown in Fig. 13(d). According to this fourth operation table 112d, the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open, the large prize opening 18 is closed.
As shown in FIG. 13(d), during a small win game, the sorting member 59 operates in such a manner that it stays at the first position.
In this way, in a small prize game, the large prize opening 18 is open for only 0.05 seconds, so it is almost impossible to get a game ball into the large prize opening 18. Also, since the distribution member 50 stays in the first position during a small prize game, even if a game ball does enter the large prize opening 18, the game ball will enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

The game status setting table 113 is used to set the game status after the end of a special game when the special game is executed, and the game status after a win/lose lottery for time-saving grant is won during a normal game state and the time-saving pattern J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a special game is executed, the game state after the special game is finished is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game, and whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (1 in this embodiment) have entered the specific area 57 during the special game. In addition, when the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 is determined as a result of a win/loss lottery during the normal game state, the game state determined for each time-saving symbol is set. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described later, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57 is set according to the type of the determined jackpot symbol, and essentially, whether or not the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state after the special game based on the determination is determined according to the determined jackpot symbol.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after a jackpot is won in a low-probability time-saving game state and the game transitions to a high-probability game state, the jackpot symbol associated with the high-probability game state setting is determined continuously without transitioning to a low-probability game state, and when the number of times the jackpot symbol is determined continuously (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high-probability settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment), the low-probability game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol is ended. In other words, when the jackpot symbol is determined continuously up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to a low-probability game state through the execution of a special game, the low-probability game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination is ended, even if the conditions for setting the high-probability game state are met.
Similarly, after winning a jackpot in a non-time-saving game state and transitioning to a time-saving game state (a second time-saving game state in this embodiment), the jackpot pattern associated with the setting of the time-saving game state is determined continuously without transitioning to the non-time-saving game state, and when the number of times the jackpot pattern is determined continuously (hereinafter referred to as the number of times of continuous time-saving settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment), the non-time-saving game state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern. In other words, when the above-mentioned jackpot pattern is determined continuously up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the non-time-saving game state through the execution of a special game, the non-time-saving game state is forcibly set after the end of the special game based on the determination, even if the conditions for setting the time-saving game state are met.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, based on the set probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of determining each jackpot pattern, it is impossible for the number of consecutive high probability settings or the number of consecutive time-saving settings to reach 10,000, and in effect, the high probability game state or the time-saving game state will continue until the conditions for setting a low probability game state or the conditions for setting a non-time-saving game state are met.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 14(a) to (j), the game state setting table 113 includes a first game state setting table 113a which is referred to when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during special play, a second game state setting table 113b which is referred to when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during special play, a third game state setting table 113c which is referred to when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during special play, a fourth game state setting table 113d which is referred to when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined in the win/lose lottery during the normal play state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, and a fourth game state setting table 113f which is referred to when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined in the win/lose lottery during the normal play state and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. a fifth game state setting table 113e that is referred to when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state; a sixth game state setting table 113f that is referred to when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state; an eighth game state setting table 113h that is referred to when the time-saving symbol J5 is determined in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state; a ninth game state setting table 113i that is referred to when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state; and a tenth game state setting table 113j that is referred to when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined in the win/loss lottery during the normal game state.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 14(a), when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game, if the number of consecutive high probability setting times has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a high probability game state, and the number of times the high probability game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the high probability number) is set to 10,000 times. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-saving setting times has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a second time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high probability settings and the number of consecutive time-saving settings have not reached the upper limit, after the special game ends, the high probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the high probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability game state is about 1/110 to 1/135, so in effect, the high probability time-saving game state continues until the jackpot is won again.

In contrast, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high probability settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low probability game state, and when the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state.

As described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays at the second position during the three rounds of the special game, so that as long as game balls are shot into the second game area 12b, a predetermined number of game balls will always enter the specific area 57. In other words, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as long as game balls are shot into the second game area 12b, a high probability time-saving game state is set without fail.
Also, although not specifically shown, when a jackpot pattern X1 is determined but a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability time-saving game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

14(b), if the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game is ended is set to a low probability time-saving game state. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached a predetermined upper limit number and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving game state (i.e., a first time-saving game state), the game state after the special game is ended is set to a second time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times.
That is, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, the low probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the second low probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability game state is about 1/150 to 1/175, so in effect, the second low probability time-saving game state continues until the jackpot is won again.

In contrast to this, in the above cases, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot was a non-time-saving game state, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state. Similarly, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state. In other words, in either case, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

As described above, when the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays in the first position during the three rounds of the special game, so that the predetermined number of game balls does not enter the specific area 57. In other words, when the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low probability time-saving game state or the normal game state is always set.

14(c), if the big win symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game is ended is set to a low probability time-saving game state. Accordingly, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached a predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game is ended is set to a second time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving settings is set to 100.
In other words, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (i.e., the second low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the results of the win/lose lottery are derived 100 times without winning a jackpot.

In contrast, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the game state after the special game ends is set to a non-time-saving game state. In other words, at this time, the game state after the special game ends is set to a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (i.e., a normal game state).

As described above, when the jackpot pattern X4 is determined, the distribution member 59 stays in the first position during the three rounds of the special game, and the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57. In other words, when the jackpot pattern X4 is determined, either the second low-probability time-saving game state or the normal game state is always set.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and time-saving pattern J1 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (i.e., the first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 10 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(e), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and time-saving pattern J2 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 20. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 20 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(f), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 30. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 30 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(g), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 50. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 50 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(h), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery results are derived 100 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(i), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1000. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) will continue until the win/lose lottery result is derived 1000 times without a jackpot being won.

As shown in FIG. 14(j), if a win/lose lottery during the normal game state results in a win for time-saving and the time-saving symbol J7 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first time-saving game state without changing the low-probability game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to one. In other words, in this case, the low-probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived once without a jackpot being won.

When the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined as described above, the first low-probability time-saving game state described above is set after the special symbol (time-saving symbol) stops changing (when the next special symbol starts changing).

As described above, the variation pattern table 114 is used to determine the variation pattern command.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the special symbol is determined as described above, a change pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. The change pattern command is for determining the change pattern of the change performance as described above, and the change pattern command determines the mode and change time of the change performance (the change time of the change display of the special symbol). In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the change performance is divided into a first half and a second half, and the mode and change time of the first half of the change performance, and the mode and change time of the second half of the change performance are both determined by the change pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific form of the variation performance (for example, an image to be displayed on the display unit 21a) based on the received variation pattern command.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple types of fluctuation pattern commands are provided, and each fluctuation pattern command is associated with a fluctuation pattern table 114. And, for each fluctuation pattern table 114, the type of fluctuation pattern command to be determined and the determination ratio are set.

The pachinko machine P in this embodiment is provided with, as the variation pattern table 114, table A which is referenced when the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 during normal game mode or the first low probability time-saving game mode (i.e., during left-hand hit), and table B and table C which are referenced when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 during the second low probability time-saving game mode or the high probability time-saving game mode (i.e., during right-hand hit) (see FIG. 15).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the game state transitions to at least either the second time-saving game state or the high-probability game state, and the number of consecutive jackpots (consecutive jackpots won from the so-called first win while at least either the second time-saving game state or the high-probability game state is continuing, hereafter referred to as consecutive jackpots) without transitioning to the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times), table B is referenced if the consecutive jackpot number condition is met, and table C is referenced if the consecutive jackpot number condition is met.

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, one fluctuation pattern random number within the numerical range of 0 to 249 is obtained, and a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on this obtained fluctuation pattern random number, the special symbol determined as described above, the current reserved number (first reserved number or second reserved number), and the fluctuation pattern table 114 according to the current game state and whether or not the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met.

Although not specifically shown, the fluctuation pattern table 114 also includes a table that is referenced when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, or when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state. However, as long as the display of the game ball launch instruction on the performance display device 21 is followed, the game ball will only enter the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the game ball will only enter the second start winning port 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, are irregular, and in the following, such irregular entries will not be taken into consideration, and the explanation will be given assuming that the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, and that the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state.

When determining a variation pattern command by referring to table A (when determining a variation pattern command based on a game ball entering the first start winning hole 15), the first reserved number at that time is referenced. On the other hand, when determining a variation pattern command by referring to table B or table C (when determining a variation pattern command based on a game ball entering the second start winning hole 16), the second reserved number at that time is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), according to table A, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (i.e., the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing symbol) and the first reserved number at the current time is 0 or 1, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209, a fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined which corresponds to a fluctuation pattern called "13-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 13 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, a fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined which corresponds to a fluctuation pattern called "20-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 13 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 7 seconds). When the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, a fluctuation pattern command "02H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern called "45-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 25 seconds) is associated, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "03H" is determined to which a fluctuation pattern called "60-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 20 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 40 seconds) is associated.

In addition, when a losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current first reserved number is 2 or more, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209, a fluctuation pattern command "04H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 3 seconds) is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, a fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "20-second fluctuation" is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, a fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the time-saving pattern J1 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BAH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "18-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 18 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B3H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".
In addition, when the time-saving pattern J2 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BBH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "30-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 30 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B4H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".
In addition, when the time-saving pattern J3 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BCH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "36-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 36 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B5H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".

In addition, when the time-saving pattern J4 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BDH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "46-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the latter half is set to 46 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B6H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation."
In addition, when the time-saving pattern J5 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BEH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "66-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 66 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B7H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation".
In addition, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 9, a fluctuation pattern command "BFH" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "68-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 68 seconds), and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "B8H" is determined which is associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation."
In addition, when the time-saving pattern J7 is determined, regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249 (whatever the value of the fluctuation pattern random number), the fluctuation pattern command "B9H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a small win), regardless of the current first reserved number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1, X2 or X3 is determined (i.e., the result of the lottery is a jackpot), regardless of the current first reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), according to table B, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 0 or 1, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern command "00H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13-second fluctuation" is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when a losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 2 or more, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209, the fluctuation pattern command "04H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), according to table C, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 0 or 1, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern command "05H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "26-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 26 seconds) is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, a fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 60 seconds) is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is 240 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "07H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 90 seconds) is determined.

In addition, when a losing pattern Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second reserved number is 2 or more, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209, a fluctuation pattern command "08H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "6-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time for the second half is set to 6 seconds) is determined, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 239, a fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern command "07H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the small winning pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "26H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "27H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second reserved number, if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, the fluctuation pattern command "A6H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "90-second fluctuation" is determined, and if the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A7H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120-second fluctuation" is determined.

In this way, the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by table C is set to be longer than the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by table B. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state, the ratio of determining a longer fluctuation time is higher after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition is established (after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number) than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition is established (before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number).
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition is met, the interval between winning one jackpot and winning the next jackpot can be longer than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition is met, and the number of special games executed per unit time (number of jackpot wins per unit time) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, the number of winning balls won by the player increases rapidly, and the player's gambling tendency becomes extremely high.

The variation pattern command determined as above is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the specific form of the first half of the variation performance and the specific form of the second half of the variation performance are determined based on the variation pattern command. Then, the variation performance is executed according to the specific form determined in this way, and the sum of the variation time of the first half and the variation time of the second half set in the variation pattern command becomes the time from the start to the end of the variation performance (variable display of special symbols).
For example, if the determined fluctuation pattern command is "02H" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second half is 25 seconds), the sum of the fluctuation time of the first half and the fluctuation time of the second half, 45 seconds (= 20 seconds + 25 seconds), becomes the fluctuation time of the entire fluctuation performance (the entire fluctuation display of the special pattern).
In addition, the fluctuation pattern commands "00H", "04H", "05H", "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", and "BFH" have the first half fluctuation time set to "0 seconds". When these fluctuation pattern commands are determined, the entire fluctuation performance is executed during the corresponding second half fluctuation time in the manner determined according to the fluctuation pattern command.

In addition, based on the above-mentioned changing time, a changing performance is performed on the performance display device 21, and a changing display of the special pattern is performed on the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device 30 or second special pattern display device 31).
Specifically, if the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning slot 15, the first special symbol display device 30 is displayed flashing during the above-mentioned variable time, and if the starting winning slot into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning slot 16, the second special symbol display device 31 is displayed flashing during the above-mentioned variable time. After the variable time has elapsed, the determined special symbol is displayed stationary. As will be described later, the special symbol is displayed stationary until a predetermined stationary display time has elapsed.

Regarding the manner of the variable presentation, rather than determining either the manner of the first half of the variable presentation or the manner of the second half of the variable presentation based on the variable pattern command, it is also possible to determine other commands besides the variable pattern command, and determine the manner of the first half of the variable presentation based on one of the commands, and determine the manner of the second half of the variable presentation based on the other command.
Also, instead of dividing the variable performance into a first half and a second half, it may be divided into more parts, with the aspect of each part being determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, the process related to the regular game will be described.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and open the movable piece 16b. If a winning ball is selected by the lottery for the normal symbol, the movable piece 16b opens for a predetermined time, and the second start winning opening 16 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
The selection of this normal symbol is carried out based on a winning determination random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and a winning determination random number determination table 116 that is stored in the main ROM 102 and is used to determine this random number.

When the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned winning random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in the general map reserve memory area of the main RAM 103, with a maximum of four numbers. Specifically, this general map reserve memory area is composed of a total of four memory areas, from the first memory area to the fourth memory area, and the winning random numbers are stored starting from the first memory area in the order of passing through the gate 20. Also, if winning random numbers have already been stored in several memory areas, the winning random number is stored in the memory area with the smallest number among the empty memory areas. If four winning random numbers have already been stored in the general map reserve memory area, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the winning random number related to this passage is not stored in the general map reserve memory area.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the winning random number is a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This winning random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers stored in the regular number reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the regular number reserve number) is stored in a regular number reserve number counter (not specifically shown).

The win determination random number judgment table 116 is used to determine whether or not a win has occurred by drawing lots for normal symbols, and as shown in Figures 16(a) to (c), it is equipped with a first judgment table 116a which is referenced during a non-time-shortened game state (i.e., during a normal game state), during a special game, and during a small win game, a second judgment table 116b which is referenced during a first time-shortened game state (i.e., during a first low-probability time-shortened game state), and a third judgment table 116c which is referenced during a second time-shortened game state (i.e., during a second low-probability time-shortened game state or a high-probability time-shortened game state).
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning random number is obtained within the range of 0 to 65535. If the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is a non-time-saving game state, or if the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is during a special game or a small winning game, the first judgment table 116a is selected, and the normal symbol is drawn based on the obtained winning random number and the selected first judgment table 116a. If the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the first time-saving game state, the second judgment table 116b is selected, and the normal symbol is drawn based on the obtained winning random number and the selected second judgment table 116b. If the game state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the second time-saving game state, the third judgment table 116c is selected, and the normal symbol is drawn based on the obtained winning random number and the selected third judgment table 116c.

16A, according to the first judgment table 116a, a win is determined when the winning determination random number is 1, and a loss is determined when the winning determination random number is other than this (0, 2 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of a win in this first judgment table 116a is 1/65536.
16B, according to the second judgment table 116b, a winning decision is made when the winning decision random number is 1 to 5, and a losing decision is made when the winning decision random number is other than these (0, 6 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this second judgment table 116b is 5/65536.
16C, according to the third judgment table 116c, a winning decision is made when the winning decision random number is between 1 and 65500, and a losing decision is made when the winning decision random number is other than this (0, 65501 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this third judgment table 116c is approximately 99/100.
If the normal symbol is selected by lottery, a winning symbol is determined, and if it is not selected, a losing symbol is determined.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment also includes a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 117 and a second start winning hole opening control table 118 as tables for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 17, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, or during a special game or a small win game, a normal pattern change pattern with a change time of 3 seconds is determined, when the game state is a first time-saving game state, a normal pattern change pattern with a change time of 2 seconds is determined, and when the game state is a second time-saving game state, a normal pattern change pattern with a change time of 0.5 seconds is determined. Then, when the normal pattern change pattern is determined, the normal pattern display device 32 (see Fig. 3) is displayed flashing during the change time set in the normal pattern change pattern. Then, when the normal pattern is selected as a winning pattern by lottery, the normal pattern display device 32 is turned on, and when the normal pattern is selected as a losing pattern by lottery, the normal pattern display device 32 is turned off.
In this specification, the flashing display of the ordinary pattern display device 32 is referred to as the "change in ordinary pattern", and the lighting or turning off of the ordinary pattern display device 32 is referred to as the "stopped display of ordinary pattern", "stop of change in ordinary pattern", "stop of change in ordinary pattern", etc.

In addition, the second start winning opening opening control table 118 is referenced to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second start winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 is turned on, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined by the second start winning hole opening control table 118. Specifically, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state, or during a special game or a small win game, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 0.05 seconds (=0.05 seconds x 1 time), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. Also, when the game state is a first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (=0.2 seconds x 1 time), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In addition, when the game state is the second time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 18, the start winning port solenoid 16c is energized for 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As described above, conditions for opening and closing the second start winning port 16 are set for each of the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and depending on the content of these conditions, the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state in the time-saving game state, making it easier for a game ball to enter the second start winning port 16 than in the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, in the first time-shortened game state among the time-shortened game states, the second start winning hole 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the non-time-shortened game state, but the second start winning hole 16 is less likely to be maintained in an open state than in the second time-shortened game state among the time-shortened game states. In other words, during the first time-shortened game state, it is easier to enter the second start winning hole 16 than in the non-time-shortened game state, and during the second time-shortened game state, it is easier to enter the second start winning hole 16 than in the first time-shortened game state. Therefore, during the second time-shortened game state, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to enter a lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls that accompanies the progress of the game compared to the non-time-shortened game state and the first time-shortened game state, and during the first time-shortened game state compared to the non-time-shortened game state.

When the game state is the time-saving game state, as described above, the process for making it easier to maintain the second start winning hole 16 in an open state includes the selection of normal symbols using the second judgment table 116b or the third judgment table 116c (a winning determination random number judgment table 116 in which the probability of winning is set higher than in the non-time-saving game state), the determination of the variable time for the first time-saving game state and the variable time for the second time-saving game state (a variable time shorter than in the non-time-saving game state), and the opening control using the opening pattern for the first time-saving game state and the opening pattern for the second time-saving game state (an opening pattern with a longer total opening time than in the non-time-saving game state), but is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above processes may be performed.

(Outline of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the special game, normal game, and special game progress as described above will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing by reading a startup program from the main ROM 102 in response to power-on, initializing flags stored in the main RAM 103, and storing various commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in a performance transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for special pattern random numbers, which is referenced when updating the special pattern random numbers. This initial value update random number for special pattern random numbers is used to determine the initial value of the special pattern random numbers. In other words, the special pattern random numbers are updated with the initial value update random number for special pattern random numbers at the time when the update is started as the initial value. Then, once this random number range has been completed, the update of the special pattern random numbers is continued with the initial value update random number for special pattern random numbers at that time as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the processing of step 102 is completed, the processing of steps 101 and 102 is repeatedly executed thereafter until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described.
A reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 20.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process for updating various timer counters.
In addition, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment employs a countdown timer, and the timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, and the countdown stops when it reaches 0.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to "0", and if the random number counter has completed one cycle, the random number is updated from the value of the special symbol random number initial value update random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 judges whether there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and executes a sensor detection time process to carry out a predetermined process based on the result. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol-related control process for controlling the special symbol game, the special game, and the small win game. Then, the process proceeds to step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a general map-related control process for controlling the general map game. Then, the process proceeds to step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing to control the occurrence and cancellation of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door open command based on the opening of the front door 3, a tray full command based on the full state of the tray 7, etc., the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error designation command (e.g., a door open command, a tray full command, etc.) and stores (sets) it in the performance transmission data storage area. Also, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above-mentioned commands, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error cancellation designation command (e.g., a door close command, a full cancellation command, etc.) and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 206.

In step 206, when the detection signals from the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, and the large winning hole detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counters provided corresponding to the respective detection signals, and transmits payout number designation commands corresponding to the respective detection signals to the launch payout control board 200. When the launch payout control board 200 pays out prize balls, a payout command is transmitted to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives the payout command, it decrements the prize ball counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 executes the creation of external information data for outputting the game status of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, start winning port solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16, large winning port solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning port 18, display data for various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol reserved display device 38, second special symbol reserved display device 39, and normal symbol reserved display device 33), etc. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 executes output control processing to perform port output processing to output signals of the data created in step 207 described above, and command transmission processing to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is terminated.

Next, the sensor detection process in step 202 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes a gate detection process for performing a lottery for a normal symbol based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 20. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first start winning hole detection process for performing a win/lose lottery based on the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second start winning hole detection process for performing a winning/losing lottery based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection process for carrying out a predetermined process based on the gaming ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the sensor detection process is terminated.

Next, the gate detection process in step 300 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the gate detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal map reservation counter (i.e., the current normal map reservation number) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the gate detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 obtains a winning determination random number and stores it in the regular pending memory area, and ends the gate detection processing.

Next, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning port in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the first start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the first reserved number counter (i.e., the current first reserved number) is less than "4". If it is judged that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the first start winning port detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first reservation number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires a win/lose random number and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area in which the win/lose random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area in which the win/lose random number was stored in step 503 described above. As a result, the acquired win/lose random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number have been stored, and stores the command in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state or a first time-saving game state. If it is judged that the current game state is neither a non-time-saving game state nor a first time-saving game state (i.e., the current game state is a second time-saving game state), the first start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the current game state is a non-time-saving game state or a first time-saving game state, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process for the stored first special random number to make various determinations regarding the winning/losing lottery before the fluctuation based on the first special random number starts (at the time when the first special random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, the process at the time of detection of the first start winning slot is terminated.

Next, the processing at the time of detecting the second start winning port in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a. If it is judged that a detection signal is not input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the second start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal is input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the second reserved number counter (i.e., the current second reserved number) is less than "4". If it is judged that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the second start winning port detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the win/lose random number and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 201, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the win/lose random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the variable pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the win/lose random number was stored in step 603 described above. As a result, the acquired win/lose random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special symbol random number has been stored, and stores the command in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current game state is the second time-shortened game state or not. If it is judged that the current game state is not the second time-shortened game state (i.e., the current game state is the non-time-shortened game state or the first time-shortened game state), the second start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the current game state is the second time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process for the stored second special random number to make various determinations regarding the winning/losing lottery before the fluctuation based on the second special random number starts (at the time when the second special random number is acquired (stored as pending)). Then, the process at the time of detection of the second start winning slot is terminated.

Next, the above-mentioned pre-determination process of step 508 and step 608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 25. In the above-mentioned pre-determination process of step 508, the following process is executed based on the win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the memory unit of the first reserved memory area, and the first reserved number, and in the above-mentioned pre-determination process of step 608, the following process is executed based on the win/loss random number, special symbol random number, and variable pattern random number stored in the memory unit of the second reserved memory area, and the second reserved number.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 checks the type of start winning slot into which the game ball entered (first start winning slot 15, second start winning slot 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved number, second reserved number), and the game state (normal game state, first low probability time-saving game state, second low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 acquires the set value of the random number judgment table 110 and one of the tables (tables A1 to A6, tables B1 to B6) corresponding to the game state confirmed in step 650 described above, and executes a win/lose judgment process to judge the result of the win/lose lottery based on the acquired table and the stored win/lose random number. After that, data related to the result of the judgment (win of a big win, win of a small win, win or miss of the time-saving grant) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Note that even in this pre-judgment process, the judgment of the win/lose of the time-saving grant is only performed when the game state confirmed in step 650 (i.e., the game state set at that time) is the normal game state, and is not performed when it is a game state other than the normal game state. Therefore, when it is a game state other than the normal game state, the result of either the win of a big win, the win of a small win, or a miss is derived. Then, proceed to the next step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of the special symbol. Specifically, if the start winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first start winning hole 15 (first special symbol random number), the first start winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and based on the table and the stored special symbol random number, the type of the big win symbol (big win symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of the small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6), or the type of the losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Also, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16 (second special symbol random number), the second starting winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and based on the table and the stored special symbol random number, the type of big win symbol (big win symbol X1, X4), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J7), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, data related to the result of the determination (type of special symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, proceed to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the game state confirmed in the above-mentioned step 650, the type of the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and whether or not the above-mentioned consecutive big win number condition (the number of consecutive big wins reaching a predetermined number) is established. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern command determination process to determine a variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 652, the reserved number, the variation pattern table 114 acquired in the above-mentioned step 653, and the stored variation pattern random number. Then, proceed to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 stores in the performance transmission data storage area the result of the winning/losing lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 612, the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 652, and the pre-determination command including the variation pattern command determined in the above-mentioned step 654. Then, the pre-determination process is terminated.
Through the above processing, for the first special pattern random number or the second special pattern random number stored as pending, the result of the win/lose lottery that is determined when the special pattern starts to change, the type of special pattern and the change pattern command are transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (i.e., before the change starts) at the time the random number is obtained by the advance determination command.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned pre-determination process determines the first special random number obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 and stored in the reserved memory area (first reserved memory area), or the second special random number obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 and stored in the reserved memory area (second reserved memory area), but is not limited to this. For example, in the pre-determination process, instead of directly determining the random number stored in the reserved memory area, it is also possible to determine a random number stored in another memory area (such as a register).

Next, the specific area detection process in step 303 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a special game is being played. If it is judged that a special game is not being played, the specific area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a special game is being played, the process proceeds to step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). If it is judged that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input the predetermined number of times, the specific area detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input the predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of gaming balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the specific area detection process is terminated.

Next, the special drawing related control processing in step 203 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of a plurality of function modules (subroutines) constituting the special symbol related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data has data "00" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation start process described later, data "01" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation stop process described later, data "02" indicating the execution of a post-stop process described later, data "03" indicating the execution of a special game control process described later, data "04" indicating the execution of a small win game control process described later, and data "05" indicating the execution of a special game end process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes any one of the following processes based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 700: special symbol variation start process (step 701), special symbol variation stop process (step 702), post-stop process (step 703), special game control process (step 704), small win game control process (step 705), or special game end process (step 706). Then, the special symbol-related control process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process in step 701 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "00", which indicates the execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is "00", the process proceeds to the next step 801. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is terminated.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the second special random number is stored in the memory section of the second reserved memory area, that is, whether or not the second reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1". If it is judged that the second special random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is judged that the second special random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the first special random number is stored in the memory section of the first reserved memory area, that is, whether or not the first reserved number counter is equal to or greater than "1". If it is judged that the first special random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it is judged that the first special random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second memory section to the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area are shifted to a memory section with a smaller number by one. As a result, the random numbers stored in the first reserved memory area are used in the win/loss determination process described below in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

In step 804, which is performed when it is determined in step 801 that the second special random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the second reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the second reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second memory section to the fourth memory section of the second reserved memory area are shifted to a memory section with a smaller number by one. As a result, the random numbers stored in the second reserved memory area are used in the winning/losing judgment process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments the count value of the variation counter for counting the number of times the winning/losing lottery is executed (the number of times the special symbol varies) by "1". The main CPU 101 also stores a variation count command including the count value of the variation count counter in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the variation count command to be sent to the sub-control board 300, which is then able to grasp the current count value of the variation count counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a win/lose determination process to derive the result of the win/lose lottery. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of the special symbol. Specifically, if the start winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first start winning hole 15 (first special symbol random number), the first start winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and based on the table, the result of the winning/losing lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 806 (winning a big win, winning a small win, winning a time-saving grant, losing), and the special symbol random number stored in a predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804, the type of the big win symbol (big win symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of the small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6), or the type of the losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. In addition, if the start winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second start winning hole 16 (second special symbol random number), the second start winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and based on the table, the result of the winning/losing lottery determined in the above-mentioned step 806 (winning a big win, winning a small win, winning a time-saving grant, losing), and the special symbol random number stored in a predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804, the type of big win symbol (big win symbol X1, X4), the type of small win symbol (small win symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J7), or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this special symbol determination process, the current game state, that is, the game state at the time when the special symbol is determined, is stored in the game state buffer. Then proceed to the next step 808.
In addition, in the fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, when both the first special chart random number and the second special chart random number are stored, the second special chart random number is processed in priority to the first special chart random number, but this is not limited to this, and they may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the pending memory area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores the symbol determination command indicating the type of the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 807 in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information regarding the determined type of the special symbol is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts a blinking display, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at a predetermined interval on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first reserved memory area, the first special symbol reserved display device 38 is displayed in a manner in which the first reserved number can be recognized, and when the second special symbol random number is stored in the second reserved memory area, the second special symbol reserved display device 39 is displayed in a manner in which the second reserved number can be recognized. When the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reserved display device 38 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the first reserved number is decreased by one at the same time as the variable display starts, and when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol reserved display device 39 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the second reserved number is decreased by one at the same time as the variable display starts.
Then, proceed to the next step 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special pattern change stop processing is executed in the special pattern related control processing, and ends the special pattern change start processing.
In step 812, which is reached when it is determined in step 802 that the first special symbol random number is not stored in the first reserved memory area, the main CPU 101 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying a customer waiting state on the performance display device 21 based on the fact that a variable display is not being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 counts the time during which a variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without a variable display of the special symbol, it stores a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 in the performance transmission data storage area, assuming that a customer waiting state has been entered. Then, the special symbol variable start process is terminated.

Next, the pass/fail determination process in step 806 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 selects one of the winning/losing random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the current game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), and executes a winning/losing random number determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won (i.e., to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won) based on the selected table and the winning/losing random number stored in the predetermined processing area of step 803 or step 804 described above. Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in a winning jackpot from the table described above, and determines whether or not the winning/losing random number described above falls within this obtained numerical range. Then, if the winning/losing random number described above falls within the numerical range described above, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and if the winning/losing random number described above does not fall within the numerical range described above, it is determined that a jackpot has not been won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the result of the jackpot winning/losing judgment process executed in the above-mentioned step 850 was a winning jackpot (i.e., whether or not a jackpot was won). If it is judged that a jackpot was not won (a non-winning jackpot), the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is judged that a jackpot was won, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main 101 stores the fact that a big win has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.
In step 853, which is performed when it is determined in step 851 that the big win has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a small win win/loss determination process to determine whether or not a small win will be won (i.e., to determine whether or not a small win will be won) based on the table selected in step 850 and the win/loss random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 (i.e., the same win/loss random number as the win/loss random number that was the subject of determination in step 850). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in a small win from the table, and determines whether or not the win/loss random number falls within this obtained numerical range. Then, if the win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, it is determined that the small win has been won, and if the win/loss random number does not fall within the numerical range, it is determined that the small win has not been won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 854.

In step 854, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the result of the small win judgment process executed in the above-mentioned step 853 was a win of a small win (i.e., whether or not a small win was won). If it is judged that a small win was not won (a small win was not won), the process proceeds to step 856. On the other hand, if it is judged that a small win was won, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main 101 stores the fact that a small win has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.

In step 856, which is reached when it is determined in step 854 that the small win has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game state currently set is the normal game state or not. If it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state (i.e., the game state is the first low-probability time-shortened game state, the second low-probability time-shortened game state, or the high-probability time-shortened game state), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to the next step 857.
In step 857, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving award determination process to determine whether or not the time-saving award is won (i.e., to determine whether or not the time-saving award is won) based on the table selected in the above-mentioned step 850 and the winning/losing random number stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804 (i.e., the winning/losing random number is the same as the winning/losing random number that was the subject of the determination in the above-mentioned step 850 and step 853). Specifically, the main CPU 101 obtains information on the numerical range that will result in the winning of the time-saving award from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned winning/losing random number falls within this obtained numerical range. Then, if the above-mentioned winning/losing random number falls within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving award is won, and if the above-mentioned winning/losing random number does not fall within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving award is not won. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 858.

In step 858, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the result of the time-saving award judgment process executed in the above-mentioned step 857 was a win for the time-saving award (i.e., whether or not the time-saving award was won). If it is judged that the time-saving award was not won (non-win of the small prize), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is judged that the time-saving award was won, the process proceeds to the next step 859.
In step 859, the main 101 stores the fact that the time-saving bonus has been awarded in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process ends.

In step 860, which is reached when it is determined in step 856 that the normal game state is not in progress, or when it is determined in step 858 that the time-saving bonus has not been awarded, the main CPU 101 stores a loss in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the win/loss determination process is terminated.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the jackpot win/loss determination process, the small win win/loss determination process, and the time-saving grant win/loss determination process are all executed by a common processing program (the same module) that selects a win/loss random number determination table 110 corresponding to the set setting value and game status, obtains information on the numerical range to be determined, and determines whether the win/loss random number belongs to the numerical range.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process in step 809 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 checks the type of start winning slot into which the game ball entered (first start winning slot 15, second start winning slot 16), the number of reserved balls (first reserved number, second reserved number), and the game state (normal game state, first low probability time-saving game state, second low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern table 114 corresponding to the game state confirmed in the above-mentioned step 900, the type of the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and whether or not the above-mentioned consecutive big win number condition (the number of consecutive big wins reaching a predetermined number) is established. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114 acquired in the above-mentioned step 901, the type of the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 807, the reserved number confirmed in the above-mentioned step 900, and the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or 804, and stores the determined variation pattern command in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in the above-mentioned step 902 in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern table 114. Then, the determined fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation time timer counter. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process in step 702 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is data "01" indicating the execution of the special symbol variation stop processing. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "01", the process proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 judges whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. If it is judged that the variable time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the variable time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for displaying the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 807 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 in a stopped state, and executes the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been determined in the performance transmission data storage area.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display time for displaying the special symbol in the stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the determined special symbol is a time-saving symbol (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7), the stop display time is set to 3 seconds, and otherwise, the stop display time is set to 0.5 seconds. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "02" so that post-stop processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 mentioned above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "02", which indicates execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the stopped display time set in the stopped display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1004 has elapsed. If it is judged that the stopped display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the stopped display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command, which indicates that the stop display time has elapsed, in the performance transmission data storage area. This notifies the sub-control board 300 that the stop display time has elapsed. The main CPU 101 also stores the current game status in the game status buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes a time-shortening count update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not either the first time-shortening game flag indicating that the current game state is the first time-shortening game state, or the second time-shortening game flag indicating that the current game state is the second time-shortening game state, is on. If it is judged that the first time-shortening game flag or the second time-shortening game flag is on, the main CPU 101 updates a time-shortening count storage area provided in the main RAM 103. In this time-shortening count storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the time-shortening game state ends is stored. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". In addition, if the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" as a result of updating the remaining number of fluctuations, the main CPU 101 also executes a process of turning off the first time-shortening game flag or the second time-shortening game flag that was on. In addition, if it is judged that neither the first time-shortening game flag nor the second time-shortening game flag is on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any process. Then, proceed to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs a high probability count update process. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a high probability game flag, which indicates that the current game state is a high probability game state, is on. If it is determined that the high probability game flag is on, the main CPU 101 updates a high probability count storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This high probability count storage area stores the number of remaining changes until the high probability game state ends. The stored remaining number of changes is then decremented by "1". If the remaining number of changes becomes "0" as a result of updating the remaining number of changes, a process of turning off the high probability game flag is also executed. If it is determined that the high probability game flag is not on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol displayed as stopped is a big win symbol. If it is judged that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a big win symbol (i.e., a small win symbol, a time-saving symbol, or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is judged that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a big win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a command for transmitting the game state when the jackpot is won and the type of the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4) that is stopped and displayed to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X1 or X2, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "10", and if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is X3 or X4, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "4". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "03" so that the special game control process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

In step 1111, which is reached when it is determined in step 1105 that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a big win symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small win symbol or not. If it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a small win symbol (i.e., a time-saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small win game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "04" so that the small win game control process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

In step 1114, which is reached when it is determined in step 1111 that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a small win symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol displayed as stopped is a time-saving symbol or not. If it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is not a time-saving symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol displayed as stopped is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes a first low-probability time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the first low-probability time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag is turned on, and the number of time-saving times is set to "10" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J1, the number of time-saving times is set to "20" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J2, the number of time-saving times is set to "30" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J3, the number of time-saving times is set to "50" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J4, the number of time-saving times is set to "100" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J5, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J6, and the number of time-saving times is set to "1" if the time-saving symbol displayed when stopped is J7. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 checks the set game state, and stores a game state command indicating the game state in the performance transmission data storage area.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

Next, the special game control process in step 704 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "03", which indicates the execution of the special game control process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "03", the process proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1108 has elapsed. If it is judged that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the special game control process is in the ending process, which is a waiting process performed after all rounds of play have ended. If it is judged that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is judged that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 executes a special winning opening opening/closing control process for opening and closing the special winning opening 18 and operating the distribution member 59 based on the special electric device operation table 112 corresponding to the type of the winning symbol stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is the time when the round game has started based on the large prize opening/closing control in the above-mentioned step 1203. If it is judged that it is not the time when the round game has started, the process proceeds to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is judged that it is the time when the round game has started, the process proceeds to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of a round game in the effect transmission data storage area.
In addition, a round play start command is provided for each number of round plays, which makes it possible to transmit to the sub-control board 300 which number of round plays has started.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the round game has ended based on the control of opening and closing the special prize opening in the above-mentioned step 1203. If it is judged that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is judged that the round game has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 judges whether the number of rounds decremented in the above-mentioned step 1207 is "0". If it is judged that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the number of rounds is "0", the process proceeds to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

In step 1210, which is reached when it is determined in step 1202 that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command, which indicates that the special game has ended, in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "05" so that the special game end process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the special game control process is ended.

Next, the small win game control process in step 705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "04" indicating the execution of the small win game control process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "04", the small win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "04", the process proceeds to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 judges whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1112 has elapsed. If it is judged that the opening time has not elapsed, the small win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the ending process, which is a waiting process performed after the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 in the small prize game control process, is in progress. If it is judged that the ending process is in progress, the process proceeds to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is judged that the ending process is not in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small win game execution process for opening and closing the big winning opening 18 based on the fourth operation table 112d in the special electric role operation table 112. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has been completed. If it is judged that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has not been completed, the small prize game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 18 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small win game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the small win game control process is terminated.

In step 1256, which is reached when it is determined in step 1252 that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the small win game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 stores a small win game end command, which indicates that the small win game has ended, in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 1258.

In step 1258, the main CPU 101 checks the set game state and stores a game state command indicating that game state in the performance transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the small win game control process is terminated.

Next, the special game ending process in step 705 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "05", which indicates the execution of the special game end process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "05", the special game end process is ended. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "05", the process proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the entry flag is on. If it is determined that the entry flag is not on (i.e., is off), the process proceeds to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the continuous probability change setting counter for counting the number of times the continuous probability change setting has been performed by 1, and also decrements the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter for counting the number of times the continuous time-saving setting has been performed by 1. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has reached 0, that is, whether the continuous probability change setting count has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is judged that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low probability game state setting process to set the game state to a low probability game state. Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned off. The main CPU 101 also sets the continuous probability change setting count counter to "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit number. Then, the process proceeds to step 1306.
In addition, in step 1305, which is reached when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1303 that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, a high probability game state setting process is executed to set the game state to a high probability game state. Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned on, and the high probability count is set to "10000". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the number of continuous time-saving setting has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is judged that the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has reached 0, the process proceeds to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-saving game state setting process to set the game state to a non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off. The main CPU 101 also sets the continuous time-saving setting count counter to "10000", which is a predetermined upper limit count. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.

In step 1308, which is reached when it is determined in step 1306 that the value of the continuous time-saving setting counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 executes a second time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to the second time-saving game state. Specifically, the second time-saving game flag is turned on, and the time-saving count is set to "10000". Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1309, which is reached when it is determined in step 1301 that the entry flag is not on, the main CPU 101 executes the same low-probability time-saving game state setting process as in step 1304, and sets the continuous probability change setting count counter to "10,000", which is the upper limit number of times determined in advance. Then, the process proceeds to step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving/non-time-saving game state setting process for setting the game state to a non-time-saving game state or a second time-saving game state. Specifically, when the jackpot pattern determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X2 or X3, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state), the second time-saving game flag is turned on and the number of time-saving times is set to "10000" in order to set the second time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off in order to set the non-time-saving game state. Also, when the jackpot pattern determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X4, the second time-saving game flag is turned on and the number of time-saving times is set to "100" in order to set the second time-saving game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1311.
In step 1311, the main CPU 101 judges whether the set gaming state is either the high probability time-shortened gaming state (the high probability gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state) or the second low probability time-shortened gaming state (the low probability gaming state and the second time-shortened gaming state). If it is judged to be neither of these, the process proceeds to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is judged to be either of these, the process proceeds to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the consecutive jackpot counter for counting the number of consecutive jackpots by 1. When the value of the consecutive jackpot counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot condition is met. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.
In step 1313, which is reached when it is determined that the game state set in step 1311 is neither the high-probability time-saving game state nor the second low-probability time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the value of the consecutive jackpot counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the game state set as described above. This game state designation command includes information on whether the high probability game flag is on or off, information on whether the first time-saving game flag is on or off, information on whether the second time-saving game flag is on or off, information on the number of high probability games, and information on the number of time-saving games, all of which are set as described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the variable start process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the special game end process is terminated.

Next, the map-related control process in step 204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal pattern execution phase data. This normal pattern execution phase data indicates which of the multiple function modules (subroutines) constituting the normal pattern related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this normal pattern execution phase data has data "10" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation start process described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation stop process described later, data "12" indicating the execution of the normal pattern stop post-processing described later, and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes either the normal symbol variation start process (step 1401), the normal symbol variation stop process (step 1402), the normal symbol stop post-stop process (step 1403), or the movable piece control process (step 1404) based on the value of the normal symbol execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 1400. Then, the normal symbol related control process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing in step 1401 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal pattern execution phase data is "10" which indicates the execution of the normal pattern variation start process. If it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is not "10", the normal pattern variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 judges whether a winning random number is stored in the normal reserved memory area, i.e., whether the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more. If it is judged that the normal reserved number counter is not "1" or more (i.e., "0"), the normal pattern variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more, the process proceeds to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the normal reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the regular reserved memory area. Specifically, the winning determination random number stored in the first memory unit is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second memory unit to the fourth memory unit are shifted to the memory unit with the next smaller number. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the regular reserved memory area are used in the winning determination process described below in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 selects a winning determination random number determination table 116 (either the first determination table 116a, the second determination table 116b, or the third determination table 116c) corresponding to the current state (non-time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, during special game, during small win game), and executes a winning determination process to derive the result of the lottery for the normal symbol based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in the above-mentioned step 1503. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a when in the non-time-saving game state, during special game, or during small win game, refers to the second determination table 116b when in the first time-saving game state, and refers to the third determination table 116c when in the second time-saving game state, and determines the winning determination random number stored in the processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the result of the winning judgment process in the above-mentioned step 1504 is a win. If it is judged to be a win, the process proceeds to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is judged to be a no win (i.e., a loss), the process proceeds to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.
In step 1507, which is reached when it is determined in step 1505 that the result of the winning determination process is not a win (i.e., a loss), the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 checks whether the current state of the pachinko machine P is a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game, or a small win game, and sets the normal pattern variation time timer counter to the normal pattern variation time corresponding to the current state of the pachinko machine P by referring to the normal pattern variation pattern determination table 117. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the normal pattern variation time counter to "3 seconds" when the pachinko machine P is in a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small win game, sets the normal pattern variation time counter to "2 seconds" when the pachinko machine P is in the first time-saving game state, and sets the normal pattern variation time counter to "0.6 seconds" when the pachinko machine P is in the second time-saving game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display data for starting the variable display of the normal symbol. As a result, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts blinking. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation memory area, the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is displayed in a manner that allows the number of reserved normal symbols to be recognized. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, the display of the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled so as to indicate that the number of reserved normal symbols is reduced by one at the same time as the variable display starts. Then, proceed to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the pachinko machine P in the gaming machine state buffer as the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to step 1511.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "11" so that the normal symbol variation stop process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol variation start process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal pattern execution phase data is data "11" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation stop processing. If it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is not "11", the normal pattern variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is "11", the process proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal symbol variation time set in the normal symbol variation time timer counter in step 1508 has elapsed. If it is judged that the variation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation stop process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbols. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbols in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that normal symbol post-stop processing is executed in the normal symbol-related control processing. Then, the normal symbol change stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbols in step 1403 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating the execution of normal symbol stop post-processing. If it is judged that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal symbol execution phase data is "12", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 judges whether the variable stop display time set in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1603 has elapsed. If it is judged that the variable stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the variable stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 judges whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is judged that the stopped normal symbol is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is judged that the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated.

In step 1704, which is reached when it is determined in step 1702 that the normal symbol displayed as stopped is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that normal symbol variation start processing is executed in the normal symbol related control processing. Then, the normal symbol post-stop processing is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal map execution phase data is data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process. If it is judged that the normal map execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal map execution phase data is "13", the process proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 judges whether the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized. If it is judged that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is judged that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 checks whether the state of the pachinko machine P at the time when the normal symbols start to vary is in a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game state, or a small win game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start winning hole opening control table 118, and sets the number of energizations (number of openings) and the energization time (opening time) as the energization control data (opening data) of the start winning hole solenoid 16c according to the state of the pachinko machine P confirmed in the above-mentioned step 1802. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

In step 1804, which is reached if it is determined in step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current-carrying time (opening time) set in step 1803 has elapsed. If it is determined that the current-carrying time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current-carrying time (opening time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, stops the power supply to the start winning hole solenoid 16c. Then, the process proceeds to step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to the Present Embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the game progresses by setting either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), a first low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state), a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state), or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state).

When a player starts playing, the normal game state is often set. During this normal game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter the first start winning hole 15, but will not enter the second start winning hole 16. A lottery is then held to see if the game ball has entered the first start winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12(a)). When the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game is ended is set to a high probability time-saving game state, and when the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game is ended is set to a normal game state (see FIG. 14(a) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the left hand is hit as instructed during the normal game state, the machine will transition to the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state by winning a jackpot (see FIG. 41). However, since the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in 1% of cases where a jackpot is won (see FIG. 12(a)), it is extremely difficult to transition to the high probability time-saving game state during the normal game state even if a jackpot is won.

Here, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 during normal game play, a win/lose lottery is held to determine whether or not the time-saving bonus will be awarded, and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus can be determined to be approximately 1 in 100 (see Figures 6(a), 7(a), 8(a), 9(a), 10(a), and 11(a)). When the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined, the game state is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state without going through a jackpot or special game, and when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 10 times without a jackpot being won, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 20 times without a jackpot being won, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 30 times without a jackpot being won. If the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 50 times without winning a jackpot, if the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 100 times without winning a jackpot, if the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 1000 times without winning a jackpot, if the time-saving symbol J7 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived once without winning a jackpot.

During this first low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot (left shot) toward the first game area 12a, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, a winning or losing lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15, as in the normal game state. Then, if a jackpot is won during this first low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot pattern X1, X2, or X3 is determined as in the normal game state, and the determination probability of each jackpot pattern (the determination probability of jackpot pattern X1 is 1%, and the determination probability of jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is 99%) is also the same as in the normal game state, so if a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is almost always determined (see FIG. 12(a)). Then, when the jackpot pattern X2 or X3 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, since the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 (see FIG. 14(b) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a jackpot is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state (until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 10 times when the time-saving symbol J1 is selected, until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 20 times when the time-saving symbol J2 is selected, until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 30 times when the time-saving symbol J3 is selected, until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 50 times when the time-saving symbol J4 is selected, until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 100 times when the time-saving symbol J5 is selected, until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 1000 times when the time-saving symbol J6 is selected, and until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived once when the time-saving symbol J7 is selected), the game will transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter the second start winning hole 16, but will not enter the first start winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12(b)). Then, if a jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, as described above, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000. In addition, when the jackpot pattern X4 is determined, the game state after the special game ends without the predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57 is set again to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times (see FIG. 14(c) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the right hit is performed as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset by winning a jackpot, or the game state transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 41). Here, when the first low-probability time-saving game state transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times, and during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning hole 16 is extremely likely to be maintained in an open state compared to during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, so that the next jackpot can be almost certainly won while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses. And because the jackpot pattern X1 is determined 70% of the time when a jackpot is won (see FIG. 12(b)), during the second low-probability time-saving game state, if a jackpot is won, it is easy to transition to the high-probability time-saving game state.

During the high probability time-saving game state, as in the second low probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (right shot) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, a lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, and if the player wins the jackpot, the jackpot pattern X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12(b)). When the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the game state after the specified number of game balls enter the specific area 57 and the special game ends is set to the high probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times. When the jackpot pattern X4 is determined, the game state after the specified number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the special game ends is set to the second low probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times (see FIG. 12(c) and FIG. 41).
During the high probability time-shortened game state, the player can almost certainly win the next big win while suppressing the decrease in game balls, similarly to the second low probability time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-saving rounds is set (see Figure 12(c) and Figure 41), but if a jackpot is won before 100 winning/losing lotteries are performed, it is possible to expect a transition to the high-probability time-saving game state again.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, during the normal game state, the aim is to transition to a first low-probability time-saving game state by winning the time-saving award (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7) based on a win/lose lottery, and then to a second low-probability time-saving game state by winning a jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state (until the result of the win/lose lottery has been derived 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, 1000 or 1 time), and then a novel gameplay is provided in which the aim is to acquire many game balls by continuing in the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state. In other words, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be entered from the normal game state without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, is given a gameplay characteristic that makes it a chance zone for entering a second low-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest.

As described above, with the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, a win/loss lottery is held during the normal game state to determine whether or not the time-saving feature will be granted, and if the win/loss lottery results in a win for the time-saving feature and the time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 or J7 is determined, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, which gives the player a novel impression regarding the transition to the time-saving game state and provides a wide variety of transitions to the time-saving game state, providing unprecedented gameplay.
In addition, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in the win/lose lottery, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been awarded based on a win/lose random number, and if it is determined that a jackpot has not been awarded, during the normal game state, a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded based on the same win/lose random number, so that the types of random numbers used to make various determinations can be reduced, and the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and main RAM 103 can be reduced.
Furthermore, with the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is the same regardless of the setting value, so the degree of advantage for each setting value changes depending on the setting of the time-saving game state that does not involve winning a jackpot, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the tendency to become too gambling becomes too great when a predetermined setting value is set.

(Outline of the effects in Pachinko machine P)
As described above, the special game, normal game, special game, and small win game progress by executing various processes in the main control board 100. During the progress of these games, the main control board 100 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 300, which receives these commands and controls the presentation associated with the progress of the games.
Below, we will explain the change effect that is executed while the special pattern is being displayed and can notify the result of the win/lose lottery, and the special notification effect that can be executed together with the change effect when the result of the win/lose lottery is a win for the time-saving grant, and can notify the win of the time-saving grant and the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state based on that win.

(Summary of the variable effects)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbols, a variable performance is executed in which the result of the winning/losing lottery is notified by the display mode of the performance symbols 50. In this variable performance, the variable display of the performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is performed superimposed on the background image displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21. Then, the result of the winning/losing lottery can be notified to the player by the combination (stop display mode) of the performance symbols 50 that are stopped and displayed after the variable display.

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, all the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a stationary state, and then the variable display of all the performance symbols 50 starts (see Figs. 42(a) and (b), Fig. 43(a) and (b)). Note that the downward arrow in the figure indicates that the performance symbols 50 are displayed scrolling from top to bottom.
After that, the performance pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop pattern), the performance pattern 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop pattern), and the performance pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop pattern) are displayed in that order (see Figures 42 (c) to (e) and Figures 43 (c) to (e)).

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, all of the performance symbols 50 are displayed as the same pattern (see FIG. 43(e)). In other words, the fact that the result of the lottery is a jackpot is announced by all of the performance symbols 50 being displayed as the same pattern.

Also, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, not all of the performance symbols 50 will be stopped and displayed in the same pattern (see FIG. 42(e)). In other words, the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss when at least one performance symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the other performance symbols 50. Note that the above-mentioned stop display mode does not actively notify the player that the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, but simply makes the player aware that it is a loss (the player has not won either a big win or a small win).
Also, although not shown in the figure, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a small winning, the performance pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a specific manner to indicate that (for example, a combination in which the first and second stop patterns are the same pattern and the third stop pattern is a special pattern indicating a small winning). In other words, the performance pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a specific manner to notify the user that the result of the winning/losing lottery is a small winning.
In addition, the stop display mode of the performance pattern 50 in the case of winning a small prize is not limited to the above content, and may be the same as when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss (i.e., at least one performance pattern 50 is stopped and displayed with a different pattern from the other performance patterns 50). In this way, the player may not be able to know whether the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss or a small prize based on the stop display mode of the performance pattern 50.

In addition, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant, the effect pattern 50 is displayed in a special manner indicating that (for example, a combination in which the first and second stop patterns are the same odd number pattern other than "7" and the third stop pattern is "7"), and a setting image indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state is set (for example, a text image of "CHANCE ZONE ENTERED!!") is displayed (see Fig. 44(g)-(h)), and the number of time-saving times is announced (see Fig. 44(i)). In other words, the effect pattern 50 is displayed in a special manner and the above-mentioned setting image is displayed to announce that the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant, and the type of time-saving pattern that has been determined is announced by announcing the number of time-saving times.

The third stop pattern is displayed almost simultaneously with the stop display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 30 or the second special pattern display device 31. This prevents the special pattern from being displayed on the first special pattern display device 30 or the second special pattern display device 31 before the stop display of the performance pattern 50, and prevents the result of the lottery from being understood based on the type of special pattern.

(The first half of the variation performance)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the first half of the variable performance (from when the variable performance starts to when the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed) is provided with a no-reach pattern in which the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed as different patterns, and a reach variable pattern in which the first and second stopping patterns are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (a so-called reach display is performed).

There are a plurality of types of no-reach patterns and reach-fluctuation patterns, and various ways of fluctuation are set.
Specifically, the no-reach patterns include a no-reach pattern A in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as different patterns without any particular change in the way the patterns change or the display content of the performance patterns 50, and a no-reach pattern B in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as different patterns after a pseudo-consecutive performance is executed in which all performance patterns 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first and second stopping patterns temporarily stop at patterns with a number difference of one, and the third stopping pattern temporarily stops at a temporary stopping pattern suggesting a temporary stop) and the changing display is resumed a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
In addition, as reach fluctuation patterns, there are provided a reach fluctuation pattern A in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as the same pattern without any particular change in the way they change or in the display content of the performance pattern 50, and a reach fluctuation pattern B in which the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as different patterns after the above-mentioned pseudo-consecutive performance is executed.

In addition, the number of times and timing of the provisional stop in the pseudo consecutive performance may be set to various times or various points in time. Also, the pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the provisional stop is performed a specific number of times (for example, four times) only when a jackpot is won or a time-saving award is won, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, it may be possible to know that the jackpot or the time-saving award has been confirmed. Also, a pseudo consecutive performance may be set in such a manner that the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach display is performed, and then the variable display is resumed, and the execution rate of the pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the execution rate of the pseudo consecutive performance is high when a jackpot is won or a time-saving award is won.
In addition, the no-reach pattern and the reach variation pattern are not limited to the above-mentioned modes. For example, the reach variation pattern may be a mode in which the reach display in which the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern are stopped and displayed as the same pattern is not performed, and instead of performing the reach display, a predetermined image is displayed to notify that a reach has occurred.

(The second half of the variation performance)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the pattern of the first half of the variable presentation is a no-reach pattern, the pattern of the second half of the variable presentation (from when the second stopping pattern is displayed to when the third stopping pattern is displayed) is a normal miss pattern in which the third stopping pattern is displayed as is, thereby informing the player that the result of the win/lose lottery is a miss (see Figure 42).
As the mode of the latter half of the variable performance when the mode of the first half of the variable performance is a reach variable pattern, after the reach is displayed, a reach development performance is executed in which a predetermined development performance image is displayed on the performance display device 21 together with the variable display of the third stop pattern, and the result of the win/loss lottery is announced as a big win, a small win, a win for the time-saving grant or a miss (see Figure 44), and a no development pattern is provided in which the above-mentioned reach development performance is not executed after the reach is displayed, and the result of the win/loss lottery is announced as a big win, a small win, a win for the time-saving grant or a miss (see Figure 43).

A plurality of types of patterns with development are provided, and various types of development performance images are set. In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, development pattern A and development pattern B are provided as patterns with development.
Development pattern A is a moving image (hereinafter referred to as development performance image A) in which the performance patterns 50 are successively destroyed and the final performance pattern 50 displayed is determined to be the third stop pattern (see Figures 44 (e) to (g)).As will be described later, this can be executed in any of the cases where a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, or a miss is won.
When the development pattern A is executed, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a big win, a display is made to indicate that the performance pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a big win has been reached, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a small win, a display is made to indicate that the performance pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a small win has been reached, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win for time-saving grant, a display is made to indicate that the performance pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a time-saving grant has been reached (see FIG. 44(e)-(g)), and if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a loss, a display is made to indicate that the performance pattern 50 constituting the stop display mode that will ultimately result in a loss has been reached. This allows the user to be notified of whether the result of the winning/losing lottery is a big win, a small win, a win for time-saving grant, or a loss.

Although not specifically shown, development pattern B displays a moving image in which a specific character challenges a mission and the result of the challenge is shown.
This development pattern B has four types of patterns, development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4, and each pattern is associated with a development presentation image B1, development presentation image B2, development presentation image B3, or development presentation image B4, which has a different content of the mission to be challenged, as a moving image to be displayed. Specifically, the development presentation image B1 is displayed in the development pattern B1, the development presentation image B2 is displayed in the development pattern B2, the development presentation image B3 is displayed in the development pattern B3, and the development presentation image B4 is displayed in the development pattern B4.

Furthermore, as will be described later, this development pattern B can only be executed when either a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus is awarded.
In addition, in any case where development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3 or development pattern B4 is executed, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning jackpot, a display is finally displayed indicating that the above-mentioned mission has been successful, followed by a stop display mode indicating a winning jackpot (see FIG. 46(b)-(d)), and if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning time-saving bonus, a display is finally displayed indicating that the above-mentioned mission has been unsuccessful, followed by a setting image and the number of time-saving bonuses indicating that a first low-probability time-saving game state has been set (see FIG. 45(e)-(h)). In this way, it is possible to notify whether the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning jackpot or a winning time-saving bonus.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a variable presentation based on development pattern B is executed, the result of the win/lose lottery is determined to be either a jackpot win or a time-saving win, thereby increasing the player's interest in the execution of a variable presentation based on development pattern B.

The development pattern is not limited to the above-mentioned form. For example, the development pattern may be such that after a specific development effect image is displayed, the display switches to another development effect image in which the expected probability of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving bonus is set higher than that of the specific development effect image, or such that after a loss is initially notified, a jackpot or time-saving bonus is notified.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a special variation pattern is provided as a variation presentation mode, separate from the various modes described above, in which all of the presentation patterns 50 are displayed in a varying manner, and then after the variation time has elapsed, these presentation patterns 50 all stop displaying at the same time.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performances, in addition to displaying an image, a specified sound may be output, and the performance lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a specified lighting pattern or color.

(Determination of the mode of variable performance)
Next, the determination of the execution mode of the above-mentioned variable performance will be explained.
A variable performance determination table 119 that defines the mode of variable performance for each variable pattern command that can be determined by the main control board 100 is stored in the main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 100 at the start of a variable performance, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the variable performance determination table 119 and determines the mode of variable performance based on the received variable pattern command.

The variable performance determination table 119 defines the mode of the variable performance in association with each variable performance random number obtained within a specified numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment) and the variable pattern command. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 100, it obtains a variable performance random number of 1 from the specified numerical range (0 to 249). The sub-CPU 301 then determines the mode of the variable performance based on the variable performance determination table 119, the received variable pattern command, and the obtained variable performance random number. As a result, the variable performance based on the determined mode is executed on the performance display device 21.

As shown in FIG. 47, according to the variable performance determination table 119, if the received variable pattern command is "00H", "04H", "05H" or "08H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a miss), then either a mode in which the first half is a no-reach pattern A and the second half is a normal miss pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 1), or a mode in which the first half is a no-reach pattern B and the second half is a normal miss pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 2) is determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "01H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a loss), then either a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 3), or a mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 9) will be determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "02H", "03H", "06H" or "07H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a loss), then either the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as mode 4), or the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as mode 10) will be determined.

Also, if the received variation pattern command is "22H", "23H", "26H" or "27H" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a small win), either mode 4 or mode 10 will be selected.

Also, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "A2H", "A3H", "A6H" or "A7H" (i.e., if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a big win), the following is determined: mode 4, the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as mode 5), the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as mode 6), the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as mode 7), the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as mode 8), mode 10, the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as mode 11), the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as mode 12), the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as mode 13), or the mode in which the first half is reach fluctuation pattern B and the second half is development pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as mode 14).

Also, if the received variation pattern command is "B3H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for time-saving grant and time-saving pattern J1 (time-saving count 10 times) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 10 or mode 11 will be determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B4H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J2 (20 times of time-saving) is determined) or "B5H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J3 (30 times of time-saving) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, mode 10, mode 11 or mode 12 will be determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B6H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J4 (50 times of time-saving) is determined) or "B7H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving symbol J5 (100 times of time-saving) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, mode 7, mode 10, mode 11, mode 12 or mode 13 will be determined.

Also, if the received variation pattern command is "B8H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J6 (1000 times of time-saving) is determined), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, mode 7, mode 8, mode 10, mode 11, mode 12, mode 13 or mode 14 will be determined.

Also, if the received variation pattern command is "B9H" (i.e., the result of the lottery is a win for time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J7 (time-saving count 1) is determined), then either mode 4 or mode 10 will be determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH" or "BFH" (i.e., if the result of the lottery is a win for time-saving), a special fluctuation pattern (hereinafter referred to as mode 15) is determined.

In addition, in Figure 47, the numbers shown in each area where the variation pattern command and the variation presentation mode are associated indicate the range of the variation presentation random numbers allocated to that area, i.e., the selection ratio (determination ratio) of that area.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the selection ratios for the variable presentation are set separately for each of the following cases: when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a losing ticket, when a big win is won, when a small win is won, and when a time-saving bonus is awarded and a predetermined time-saving symbol is determined.

For example, when the result of the lottery is a big win or a time-saving bonus, the probability of reach fluctuation pattern A being determined is lower compared to when it is a miss or a small win, but the probability of reach fluctuation pattern B being determined is higher. Therefore, when reach fluctuation pattern B is executed, the expectation of winning a big win or a time-saving bonus is higher than when reach fluctuation pattern A is executed.

In addition, while development pattern A can be determined in any case where the result of the lottery is a miss, a small win, a big win, or a time-saving bonus, development pattern B (B1, B2, B3, B4) can only be determined in any case where the result of the lottery is a big win or a time-saving bonus. Therefore, when development pattern B is executed, the result of the lottery is confirmed as either a big win or a time-saving bonus, and it becomes clear that one of these has been won.

In addition, the development pattern B1 can be determined when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J1 (10 times the time-saving number), J2 (20 times the time-saving number), J3 (30 times the time-saving number), J4 (50 times the time-saving number), J5 (100 times the time-saving number) or J6 (1000 times the time-saving number) is determined. The development pattern B2 can be determined when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J2, J3, J4, J5 or J6 is determined. The development pattern B3 can be determined when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J4, J5 or J6 is determined. The development pattern B4 can be determined when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a winning for time-saving grant and the time-saving pattern J6 is determined.
In other words, if the result of the lottery is a win for the time-saving bonus, when the time-saving pattern J1 is determined, only development pattern B1 of development pattern B can be determined; when the time-saving pattern J2 or J3 is determined, development pattern B1 and development pattern B2 of development pattern B can be determined; when the time-saving pattern J4 or J5 is determined, development pattern B1, development pattern B2 and development pattern B3 of development pattern B can be determined; and when the time-saving pattern J6 is determined, development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3 and development pattern B4 of development pattern B can all be determined.

In other words, when development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J1, which specifies a time-saving count of 10 times, is selected, the execution rate of development pattern B1 is 100%, and the execution rates of development patterns B2, B3, and B4 are all 0%. When development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J2, which specifies a time-saving count of 20 times, or time-saving pattern J3, which specifies a time-saving count of 30 times, is selected, the execution rate of development patterns B1 and B2 is 50%, and the execution rate of development patterns B3 and B4 is 0%. The execution rates are all 0%, and when development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J4, which specifies a time-saving count of 50 times, is selected or when time-saving pattern J5, which specifies a time-saving count of 100 times, is selected, the execution rates of development patterns B1, B2, and B3 are all about 33%, and the execution rate of development pattern B4 is 0%, and when development pattern B is executed when time-saving pattern J6, which specifies a time-saving count of 1000 times, is selected, the execution rates of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are all 25%. In other words, the execution rates of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 differ depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

When development pattern B1 is executed, a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 10 or more (10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B2 is executed, a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 20 or more (20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B3 is executed, a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 50 or more (50, 100, or 1000) is confirmed. When development pattern B4 is executed, a jackpot is won or a time-saving bonus with the number of time-saving bonuses set to 1000 is confirmed.

In this way, with the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the execution rate of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 varies depending on the number of times the time is reduced when the time-reduction bonus is awarded, and the player can be given different expectations regarding the number of times the time can be reduced depending on the type of development pattern B executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the variable presentation of development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win, the variable presentation by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 can be executed, but if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a small win or a miss, the variable presentation by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is not executed. In other words, the execution rate of the variable presentation by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is higher when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win than when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a small win or a miss. Therefore, by executing the variable presentation by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot win or the time-saving win can be increased, and the interest of the player in the variable presentation by the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 can be increased.

In addition, the variable effects of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 may be executed at a lower rate than when the result of the lottery is a big win or a time-saving bonus, rather than being not executed when the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss.

In addition, during the variable performance, along with the display of the changing performance pattern 50, a preview performance is executed in which various preview images are displayed to indicate the expected probability of winning the jackpot or the expected probability of winning the time-saving bonus.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the likelihood of the above-mentioned preview performance being executed in the event of a jackpot win or a time-saving bonus being awarded is set separately. This makes it possible to change the player's sense of anticipation for winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus depending on the preview performance that is executed. Specifically, a particular preview performance is set to be more likely to be executed in the event of a jackpot win or a time-saving bonus being awarded, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation for winning a jackpot or a time-saving bonus.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the possibility of a specific preview performance being executed is set to be higher when a time-saving bonus is awarded than when a jackpot is awarded.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 48, a line preview in which a line by a predetermined character is displayed can be executed as a preview effect executed before a reach display during a variable performance. Three patterns of line preview, namely, line preview A, line preview B, and line preview C, are provided as modes of the line preview.
In addition, as a notice effect executed after a reach display during a variable effect, a cut-in notice in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed can be executed. There are three types of cut-in notice: a blue cut-in notice in which a blue cut-in image is displayed, a red cut-in notice in which a red cut-in image is displayed, and a purple cut-in notice in which a purple cut-in image is displayed.

If the player is selected to receive the time-saving feature through a lottery, then the line previews A and B can be executed, with the probability that line preview A will be executed 15% of the time and line preview B will be executed 10% of the time. In addition, the cut-in previews can be executed blue, red, and purple, with the probability that blue cut-in previews will be executed 10% of the time, red cut-in previews 40% of the time, and purple cut-in previews 55% of the time.

In addition, if the jackpot is won through the lottery, the following line previews can be executed: Line Preview A, Line Preview B, and Line Preview C. In this case, Line Preview A is executed 15% of the time, Line Preview B is executed 20% of the time, and Line Preview C is executed 25% of the time. In addition, the blue cut-in preview and red cut-in preview can be executed as cut-in previews. In the above cases, the blue cut-in preview is executed 10% of the time, and the red cut-in preview is executed 25% of the time.

In addition, if the lottery results in a loss or small win, line preview A and line preview B can be executed as line previews, and in this case, line preview A is executed 3% of the time, and line preview B is executed 5% of the time. In addition, blue cut-in preview and red cut-in preview can be executed as cut-in previews, and in the above cases, blue cut-in preview is executed 5% of the time, and red cut-in preview is executed 10% of the time.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a time-saving bonus is awarded, the rate at which line preview A is executed is the same as when a jackpot is won, but the rates at which line preview B and line preview C are executed are both small, so that when line preview B or line preview C is executed, the player can have a sense of anticipation for winning the jackpot. Furthermore, line preview C can only be executed when a jackpot is won, so when line preview C is executed, the jackpot is confirmed, increasing the player's interest.

On the other hand, when the time-saving prize is won, the rate at which the blue cut-in notice is executed is the same as when the jackpot is won, and the rate at which the red cut-in notice is executed and the rate at which the purple cut-in notice is executed are both high, so that when the red cut-in notice or the purple cut-in notice is executed, the player can have high expectations for the time-saving prize. Note that the purple cut-in notice can only be executed when the time-saving prize is won, so when the purple cut-in notice is executed, the time-saving prize is confirmed, and the player's interest can be heightened.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for winning a time-saving bonus, which has a high probability of transitioning to a time-saving game state, rather than winning a jackpot, which has a very high probability of transitioning to a time-saving game state, and thus makes it extremely difficult to achieve this.

In addition, the effects that can be executed on the pachinko machine P of this embodiment are not limited to the variable effects described above, and for example, a pre-reading effect may be provided that gives a suggestion regarding the hold stored in the hold memory area before a variable effect related to the hold is executed.
Specifically, the look-ahead performance may include a hold look-ahead performance in which, when a new hold is stored, the hold is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a special mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant is higher than in the normal mode; a hold change look-ahead performance in which, at any timing from the time the hold is stored to the time the variable performance based on the hold ends, the hold display being displayed in a predetermined mode is changed to a mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant is higher; and a look-ahead zone performance in which, when a new hold is stored, a high expectation suggestive image (for example, a background image) is displayed suggesting a high expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant during the variable performance based on the hold, or across multiple variable performances from a variable performance based on a hold stored earlier than the hold to a variable performance based on the hold.

The system may be set up so that the chances of a hold preview effect, hold change preview effect, preview zone effect, or the like, in which the hold display is performed in the special manner described above, are higher when a time-saving bonus is awarded than when a jackpot is awarded.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49, three patterns of hold change pre-reading effects are provided: a blue hold change where the white hold display changes to a blue hold display, a red hold change where the white hold display changes to a red hold display, and a purple hold change where the white hold display changes to a purple hold display. Additionally, three patterns of pre-reading zone effects are provided: zone A where a first high expectation suggestion image is displayed, zone B where a second high expectation suggestion image is displayed, and zone C where a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed.

Then, if any of the stored holds is determined to be a winner for the time-saving grant through a win/lose lottery, a blue hold change, a red hold change, and a purple hold change can be executed as a hold change pre-reading performance targeting the above-mentioned holds, and in the above-mentioned cases, the rate at which a blue hold change is executed may be 10%, the rate at which a red hold change is executed may be 40%, and the rate at which a purple hold change is executed may be 55%. Also, zone A and zone B can be executed as pre-reading zone performance targeting the above-mentioned holds, and in the above-mentioned cases, the rate at which zone A is executed may be 15%, and the rate at which zone B is executed may be 10%.

In addition, if any of the stored reserves is determined to be a jackpot through a win/lose lottery, a blue reserve change and a red reserve change can be executed as a reserve change pre-reading performance targeting the above-mentioned reserves, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that a blue reserve change is executed may be 10%, and the probability that a red reserve change is executed may be 25%. In addition, zone A, zone B, and zone C can be executed as pre-reading zone performance targeting the above-mentioned reserves, and in this case, the probability that zone A is executed may be 15%, the probability that zone B is executed may be 20%, and the probability that zone C is executed may be 25%.

In addition, if any of the stored reserves is determined to be a miss or a small win by the win/lose lottery, a blue reserve change and a red reserve change can be executed as a reserve change pre-reading performance targeting the above-mentioned reserves, and in the above-mentioned cases, the probability that a blue reserve change will be executed may be 5%, and the probability that a red reserve change will be executed may be 10%.In addition, zone A and zone B can be executed as pre-reading zone performance targeting the above-mentioned reserves, and in this case, the probability that zone A will be executed may be 3%, and the probability that zone B will be executed may be 5%.

That is, when the setting is as described above, when it is determined that the time-saving award is won, the rate at which the blue reserve change is executed is the same as when it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the rate at which the red reserve change is executed and the rate at which the purple reserve change is executed are both high, so that when the red reserve change or the purple reserve change is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the time-saving award. Note that the purple reserve change can be executed only when it is determined that the time-saving award is won, so when the purple reserve change is executed, the decision to grant the time-saving award is confirmed, and the player's interest can be heightened.
Even when set in this way, the player's expectations for winning the time-saving bonus can be increased more than for winning the jackpot.

When set as described above, when it is determined that a time-saving bonus has been won, the rate at which zone A is executed is the same as when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and the rates at which zone B and zone C are executed are both small, so that when zone B or zone C is executed, the player can have high hopes for a jackpot win. Furthermore, since zone C can only be executed when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, when zone C is executed, the jackpot win is confirmed, which can heighten the player's interest.

(Summary of special announcements)
The special notification effect is an effect that can be executed in conjunction with the variation effect when the result of the win/lose lottery is a win for the time-saving grant and a variation effect is performed using a special variation pattern (i.e., when the determined variation pattern command is "BAH,""BBH,""BCH,""BDH,""BEH," or "BFH"), and can notify the player of the win of the time-saving grant and the number of times the time will be saved in the first low-probability time-saving game state based on the win.

This special notification effect is executed continuously from the start of the fluctuation effect until the predetermined stop display time for each special symbol (all time-saving symbols are 3 seconds) has elapsed after the fluctuation effect has ended when the fluctuation time predetermined for each fluctuation pattern command has elapsed.
Specifically, in the special notification performance, after a predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, all images (performance symbols 50, background images, etc.) displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 are erased, the entire surface of the display unit 21a is displayed in black, and all lamps (performance lighting device 23) installed in the pachinko machine P are turned off, starting a blackout performance (see Fig. 50 (a) to (c)). Then, after a predetermined blackout performance execution time (4 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, a variable display of a performance symbol 50 smaller than the performance symbol 50 before the start of the blackout performance is started in the upper right corner of the display unit 21a, and the variable performance is resumed, and a window is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a, and a count-up display of numbers is started in this window (see Fig. 50 (d)). The count-up display is executed until the variable time set in the variable pattern command has elapsed (see Fig. 50 (e) to (h)). Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the number in the window mentioned above reaches the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern determined based on the winning of the time-saving award, and the count-up display ends with the end of the variable presentation (see FIG. 50(h)). After that, until the stop display time has elapsed, a setting image indicating that the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set and the number of time-saving times are displayed (see FIG. 50(i)-(j)), and the special notification presentation ends with the elapse of the stop display time.

In the above-mentioned count-up display, the number in the window increases by a predetermined number (1 in this embodiment) every time a predetermined count time (1 second in this embodiment) elapses until the number in the window reaches a predetermined value (20 in this embodiment) (see Figures 50 (d) to (e)).
In addition, when the number in the window reaches "10" or "20" (i.e., the value of the number of time-saving times that can be set), a display that goes back and forth between the displayed number and the next displayed number is performed, thereby creating a sense of expectation for counting up to the next number (see Fig. 50(f)-(g), Fig. 51(a)-(d), Fig. 52(a)). Here, if a time-saving pattern corresponding to a number of time-saving times greater than the displayed number has been determined, the above-mentioned provocative effect is performed, and the count-up display continues (see Fig. 51(a)-(b)). On the other hand, if a time-saving pattern corresponding to the same number of time-saving times as the displayed number has been determined, the count-up display ends with the displayed number without counting up to the next number as the provocative effect ends (i.e., at this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed (see Fig. 50(h)-(j), Fig. 51(e)-(g)).

In addition, if a time-saving pattern corresponding to a time-saving number of times exceeding 20 (30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times) has been determined, the number in the window will exceed "20" and a count-up display will be performed, but after the number in the window exceeds "20" through the above-mentioned teasing effect, a shielding effect is executed in which the number in the window is covered with a predetermined shielding image (for example, an image of "???") (see FIG. 52(b)). Then, when the time corresponding to the determined number of time-saving times has elapsed, the shielding image is erased and the number indicating the determined number of time-saving times is suddenly displayed in the window, ending the count-up display (i.e., the variable time has elapsed at this point and the variable effect has ended), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed (see FIG. 52(c) to (e)). By covering the number in the window with the shielding image in this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the number that will ultimately be displayed in the window (i.e., the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving pattern).

The progress of the special notification performance will be explained in more detail below.
(1) When the time-saving pattern J1 (time-saving count 10 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BAH" (fluctuation time 18 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(a), the blackout effect starts 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect by the special fluctuation pattern, and the blackout effect ends and the count-up display starts 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect. Then, 16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "10" and the teasing effect is executed, and 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the teasing effect ends and the number in the window stops at "10". At this point, the fluctuation effect ends. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving counts are displayed until the 3-second stop display time has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 10, the execution time of the special notification effect is 21 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stopped display time.

(2) When the time-saving pattern J2 (time-saving times 20 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BBH" (fluctuation time 30 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation performance by the special fluctuation pattern, the special notification performance proceeds in the same manner as in (1), but after 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation performance and the stimulating performance has ended, the number in the window exceeds "10" and the count-up display continues. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation performance, the number in the window reaches "20" and the stimulating performance is executed, and 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation performance, the stimulating performance ends and the number in the window stops at "20". At the same time, the fluctuation performance ends at this point. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification performance ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 20, the execution time of the special notification effect is 33 seconds from the start of the variable performance to the end of the variable performance and the elapse of the stopped display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10.

(3) When the time-saving pattern J3 (time-saving count 30 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BCH" (fluctuation time 36 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation performance by the special fluctuation pattern, the special notification performance proceeds in the same manner as in (2), but after 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation performance and the teasing performance has ended, the shielding performance is executed. Then, 36 seconds after the start of the fluctuation performance, the shielding performance ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "30" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation performance ends. After that, until the stop display time of 3 seconds has passed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving times are displayed, and the special notification performance ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 30, the execution time of the special notification effect is 39 seconds from the start of the variable performance to the end of the variable performance and the elapse of the stopped display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10 or 20.

(4) When the time-saving pattern J4 (50 times of time-saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BDH" (fluctuation time 46 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. After that, 46 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "50" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time-saving are displayed until the 3-second stop display time has passed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 50, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable performance to the end of the variable performance and the elapse of the stopped display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10, 20, or 30.

(5) When the time-saving pattern J5 (time-saving count 100 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" (fluctuation time 66 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) and (4) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. After that, 66 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "100" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. After that, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving counts are displayed until the 3-second stop display time has passed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 100, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable performance to the end of the variable performance and the elapse of the stopped display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10, 20, 30, or 50.

(6) When the time-saving pattern J6 (time-saving count 1000 times) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" (fluctuation time 68 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as (3) to (5) until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation effect and the obscuring effect is executed. Then, 68 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the obscuring effect ends, the obscuring image is erased, and the number "1000" is displayed in the window. At this point, the fluctuation effect also ends. Then, until the 3-second stop display time has passed, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time-saving counts are displayed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the time-saving count is set to 1,000, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable performance to the end of the variable performance and the elapse of the stopped display time, which is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when the time-saving count is set to 10, 20, 30, 50, or 100.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol J7 (time-saving count of 1) is determined, the special variation pattern is not performed, and the special notification effect is not executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the time-saving award is won, the more the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol increases, the longer the execution time of the special notification effect becomes. In other words, after the special notification effect is executed, the game state shifts to the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state), which is advantageous for the player, but if the execution period of the special notification effect becomes longer, the execution period of the first low-probability time-saving game state to which the game state shifts after the execution of the effect becomes longer.
Therefore, if the execution period of the special notification effect is longer, the gaming profit (award of time-saving gaming state) given to the player will be greater, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special notification effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a time-saving bonus is awarded and a special notification effect is executed, a first low-probability time-saving game state is set in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole 16 without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, so the large winning hole 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Therefore, the operation control of the structure (large winning hole 18) during the above-mentioned period is reduced, and the burden on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

Next, the control process in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes described above will be described.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
In step 2000, in response to power-on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processes of flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303 are executed.
In step 2001, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process of updating each effect random number (variable effect random number), and thereafter repeats the process of step 2001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). When this reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub-CPU 301 reads a timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

In step 2100, the sub-CPU 301 executes an update process for various timer counters used in the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2101.
In addition, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment employs a countdown timer, and the timer counter is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and the countdown stops when it reaches 0.
In step 2101, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 303, and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub-control board 300 performs a command reception interrupt process, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in the receive buffer. The sub-CPU 301 then analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer by the command reception interrupt process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2102.

In step 2102, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the operation of the performance operation device 9 is acceptable or not according to the progress of the variable performance being executed, and judges whether the operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. If the operation of the performance operation device 9 is being accepted when the operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, the command is stored in the transmission buffer to transmit the fact that the performance operation device 9 has been operated to various control boards such as an image control board (not shown), an audio control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Then, proceed to the next step 2103.
In step 2103, the sub-CPU 301 transmits the commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 303 to various control boards such as the image control board, the audio control board, the illumination control board, etc. Then, the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is terminated.

Next, the variation pattern command reception process executed when a variation pattern command is received among the command analysis processes in step 2101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 57. As described above, the variation pattern command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 903 of the variation pattern determination process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the output control process in step 208.
In step 2200, the sub-CPU 301 acquires the variable performance random number updated in the above-mentioned step 2001. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2201.
In step 2201, the sub-CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable performance based on the variable performance determination table 119, the variable performance random number acquired in the above-mentioned step 2200, and the received variable pattern command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 2202.

In step 2202, the sub-CPU 301 sets a variable performance execution command corresponding to the determined variable performance mode in the transmission buffer. The variable performance execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 2103, and these control boards control the execution of variable performance based on the received variable performance execution command. Then, the variable pattern command reception process ends.

In the above-described embodiment, the special notification effect is started when the variable effect related to the winning of the time-saving award starts, and ends when the variable effect ends and the stopped display time of the special pattern has elapsed. By varying the variable time set in the variable pattern command corresponding to the time-saving pattern, the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving pattern (the number of time-saving times set) is changed, but this is not limited to this.
For example, for any time-saving symbol, the variable time set in the corresponding variable pattern command is the same, but the stop display time for each time-saving symbol may be set to be different so that the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (the number of time-saving times to be set) changes. Also, by making both the variable time and the stop display time different, the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (the number of time-saving times to be set) may be set to be different.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, the special notification effect may be executed not in the period from the start of the variable performance related to the winning of the time-saving award to the time when the stop display time of the special symbol after the end of the variable performance has elapsed, but in the period from the start to the end of the variable performance described above. Specifically, it may be executed from a predetermined start point in the variable performance described above (for example, the start point of the variable performance, a time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, etc.) and may be executed at a predetermined end point in the variable performance (for example, a time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, a time when the variable performance ends, etc.).
In addition, the special notification performance may be executed during the period from when the special random number (first special random number) that is the winning of the time-saving grant is acquired to when the variable performance related to the winning of the time-saving grant ends. Specifically, for example, it may be executed during a period during one variable performance (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead variable performance) executed before the variable performance related to the winning of the time-saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the variable performance), or it may be executed during a period spanning multiple look-ahead variable performances, or it may be executed during a period spanning from the look-ahead variable performance to the variable performance.
When set in this manner, the timing of the special notification effects can be varied, enhancing the player's interest.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is possible to derive whether or not the time-saving award is won as a result of the judgment in the win/lose lottery, and if the time-saving award is won, a time-saving play state (first time-saving play state) is set. However, instead of deriving whether or not the time-saving award is won as a result of the judgment in the win/lose lottery, a special pattern (i.e., a small win pattern or a losing pattern) that can be determined based on a judgment result other than a big win in the win/lose lottery (i.e., a small win or a losing pattern) may be used as the time-saving pattern, and whether or not the time-saving play state can be set (whether or not the time-saving award is won) may be determined depending on the type of special pattern determined above.

For example, a losing symbol ZA1, a losing symbol ZA2, a losing symbol ZA3, etc. may be provided as a losing symbol that is determined when a winning/losing lottery based on a winning/losing random number results in a losing result, and when a losing symbol ZA1 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 10 is set, when a losing symbol ZA2 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 20 is set, and when a losing symbol ZA3 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 30 is set. In this case, too, a variable presentation according to the variable pattern B similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment may be executed, or a special notification presentation similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment may be executed.

Similarly, small win patterns YA1, YA2, YA3, etc. may be provided as small win patterns to be determined when a small win is won by a win/lose lottery based on a win/lose random number, and when the small win pattern YA1 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 10 is set, when the small win pattern YA2 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 20 is set, and when the small win pattern YA3 is determined, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 30 is set. In this case, too, a variable presentation by the variable pattern B similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment may be executed, or a special notification presentation similar to that of the above-mentioned embodiment may be executed.
In addition, in the case where the time-saving game state is set based on the small win symbol as described above, the special notification effect may be set to be executed during the period from when the variable effect based on the winning of the small win starts to when the small win game based on the winning of the small win ends. In this case, the execution time of the special notification effect for each small win symbol may be set to change by changing one or more of the variable effect change time, the stop display time of the special symbol, the opening time of the small win game, the opening time of the large winning port 18 during the small win game, and the ending time of the small win game.
In addition, the above-mentioned special notification effect may be executed in the same manner as described above during the period from when the special random number (first special random number) that resulted in a small win is obtained to when the variable effect related to the small win ends.
When set in this manner, the variety of time-saving winnings will be greater, which can increase the player's interest.

In the above embodiment, the more the number of time-saving times set in response to the determined time-saving pattern is, the longer the execution time of the special notification effect is set, but the target of such control is not limited to the special notification effect that can be executed when the time-saving award is won. For example, if one of a plurality of jackpot patterns is determined based on the winning of a jackpot, and the number of round games to be executed during a special game is determined for each jackpot pattern, the more the number of round games to be executed in response to the jackpot pattern is, the longer the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the winning of the jackpot is set. In other words, the longer the variable time of the variable effect executed based on the winning of a jackpot is, the more the number of round games to be executed during the special game to be executed thereafter is set.
Also, the more the number of rounds of play executed in response to the big win symbol increases, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead performance that can be executed before the variable performance executed based on the winning of the big win may be set. In other words, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead performance, the more the number of rounds of play during the special game that is executed thereafter may be set.
When set in this manner, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable effects based on winning a jackpot and in the predictive effects that can be executed before the variable effects.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the large prize winning port 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set, but it is also possible to prevent other prize winning ports (for example, the second start prize winning port 16) from being opened during the period from when the variable effect based on the winning of the large prize is executed until the special game advantageous to the player starts.

In addition, the variable effects and special notification effects of development pattern B in the above-mentioned embodiment may be executed not only when the time-saving bonus is awarded by the winning/losing lottery, but also when the jackpot is won and a jackpot pattern that is set to set the time-saving game state is determined.

(Modification)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is made only in the win/loss lottery during a normal game state that combines a low-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively unlikely to be maintained in an open state. The determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is not made in the win/loss lottery during other game states (such as a high-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high or a time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively likely to be maintained in an open state (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state)). As a result, the time-saving award will only be granted during the normal game state, and will not be granted during other game states. However, the control for deriving the result of such a win/loss lottery is not limited to this.

For example, a table (FIGS. 6(b), 7(b), 8(b), 9(b), 10(b), 11(b)) may be provided as the win/lose random number determination table 110 referenced during a high probability game state or a time-saving game state, in which the numerical range of the win/lose random number that will result in a win for the time-saving award is not set, and in the win/lose lottery during a high probability game state or a time-saving game state, the win/lose of the time-saving award may be determined based on the above-mentioned table. In this case, during a high probability game state or a time-saving game state, the determination of the time-saving award is made based on the win/lose random number determination table 110 that will not determine the win of the time-saving award, so that, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, the time-saving award cannot be won during a game state other than the normal game state.
Also, for example, a numerical range of the win/loss random number that will result in a win for the time-saving grant is set in the win/loss random number judgment table 110 that is referenced during a high probability game state or a time-saving game state, and in the win/loss lottery during a high probability game state or a time-saving game state, the win/loss of the time-saving grant is judged based on the table, but if the time-saving grant is won, the judgment result of the win for the time-saving grant may be forcibly rewritten to a non-win for the time-saving grant, or the judgment result of the win for the time-saving grant may be discarded. Even in such a case, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, it becomes impossible to win the time-saving grant during a game state other than the normal game state.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment is achieved, and the judgment in the win/lose lottery can be executed in game states other than the normal game state in the same way as in the normal game state, so that the judgment in the win/lose lottery is standardized and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.
In the above embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is set to be the same regardless of which set value is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to be different depending on the set value. In the above embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus when the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 are both set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to be different between the case where the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 and the case where the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16. In addition, the number of time-saving bonuses may be set to be different depending on the set game state and the type of time-saving symbol determined when the time-saving bonus is won.
When set in this manner, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the performance of the time-saving gaming state can be varied to increase the player's interest.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when a player is selected to receive a time-saving bonus based on the result of a win/loss lottery using a win/loss random number, a time-saving bonus pattern is determined by a process of determining a special pattern different from the win/loss lottery using a special pattern random number different from the win/loss random number, and the number of times the time-saving bonus is applied is determined according to the type of time-saving bonus pattern determined (J1, J2, J3), but this is not limited to this.
For example, the setting may be such that both the winning of the time-saving grant and the determination of the number of time-saving times may be determined by a winning/losing lottery using a winning/losing random number. In other words, the winning of the time-saving grant and the determination of the number of time-saving times may be determined by the same random number and the same process, rather than by separate random numbers and separate processes.
Specifically, in the win/loss random number determination table 110, a numerical range is set that is determined as a win for the time-saving award and is associated with a predetermined time-saving pattern, and when the acquired win/loss random number falls within the numerical range, the win for the time-saving award and the number of time-saving times set for the time-saving pattern corresponding to the numerical range are determined. For example, as the win/loss random number determination table 110 that is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15 during a low probability game state, a table A1a can be provided in which, when the win/loss random number is 3310 to 3637, a win for the time-saving award associated with the time-saving pattern J1 (time-saving times 10 times) is determined, and when the win/loss random number is 3638 to 3964, a win for the time-saving award associated with the time-saving pattern J2 (time-saving times 20 times) is determined (see FIG. 58). According to this table A1a, if the winning/losing random number is between 3310 and 3637, it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, so that the number of time-saving times is determined to be 10. Also, if the winning/losing random number is between 3638 and 3964, it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, so that the number of time-saving times is determined to be 20.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the processing load in the win/lose lottery is reduced, since the winning or losing of the time-saving grant and the number of times the time-saving grant will be determined solely by the process of determining whether or not the time-saving grant will be granted in the win/lose lottery.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, after a determination as to whether or not a time-saving effect will be awarded in a win/lose lottery during normal game mode is made, if the result of the determination is a win in the awarding of a time-saving effect, a time-saving symbol corresponding to the number of times the time-saving effect is to be applied is determined. However, the order of processing is not limited to this.
For example, after the time-saving symbol is determined, a winning/losing lottery may be held to determine whether the time-saving bonus will be awarded. If the time-saving bonus is awarded, a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) may be set, and the number of times the time-saving bonus will be applied may be set to the previously determined time-saving symbol.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether a big win has been made, the determination of whether a small win has been made, and the determination of whether a time-saving bonus has been awarded are all performed by referring to the same win/loss random number determination table 110, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving feature has been awarded may be performed by referring to a specific table that is used only for determining whether or not a time-saving feature has been awarded, which is different from the win/loss random number determination table 110 used for determining whether or not a big win has been achieved and whether or not a small win has been achieved.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(5) In the above embodiment, multiple types of time-saving symbols are provided to which the number of time-saving times is associated, and the number of time-saving times is determined according to the determined time-saving symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, one type of time-saving symbol J is provided to which only the winning of the time-saving award is associated and the number of time-saving times is not associated, and when the winning of the time-saving award is won by the winning/losing lottery, the time-saving symbol J is determined, and the number of time-saving times is determined by a specific lottery separate from the winning/losing lottery.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the storage capacity of the main ROM 102 for special symbols can be reduced, while the space for storing other information can be increased.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is made only in the win/lose lottery during the normal game state, which is a combination of a low-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively unlikely to be kept open, and the time-saving award can be awarded (determination of the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3). In the win/lose lottery during a high-probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high or during a time-saving game state in which the second start winning port 16 is relatively likely to be kept open (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state), the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted is not made, and the time-saving award cannot be awarded. However, this is not limited to this, and the determination of whether or not the time-saving award will be granted may be made in the win/lose lottery even during a time-saving game state.

Specifically, for example, in a win/loss lottery during a first low-probability time-saving game state (i.e., during a game state in which a time-saving game state is set) in which a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state are combined, a judgment of whether or not the time-saving grant will be granted may be made, and the time-saving grant may be awarded (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3). Then, in a win/loss lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, a judgment of whether or not the time-saving grant will be granted is made, resulting in a win of the time-saving grant and a time-saving symbol being determined, and the first time-saving game state may be reset, and the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol (10 times for the time-saving symbol J1, 20 times for the time-saving symbol J2, and 1 time for the time-saving symbol J3) may be reset (overwriting the current number of time-saving times). For example, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if a time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (time-saving times 20) is determined, the first time-saving game state may be reset and the number of time-saving times may be set to "20" again. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state will continue until the result of the win/lose lottery is derived 20 times again without winning the jackpot.
In the above case, the number of time-saving times associated with the time-saving symbol may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times at the time point, instead of resetting the number of time-saving times associated with the time-saving symbol. For example, when the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (20 times of time-saving times) is determined, the first time-saving game state may be reset and the remaining number of time-saving times may be updated to "25 times (= 5 times of remaining time-saving times + 20 times of time-saving times set by the time-saving symbol J2)". In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state will continue until the result of the winning/losing lottery is derived 25 times again without winning the jackpot.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the opportunities for a time-saving game state to be set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and heightening the player's interest.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, three types of time-saving patterns were provided as the time-saving patterns that may be determined when a time-saving bonus is awarded: time-saving pattern J1 with the number of time-saving times set to 10, time-saving pattern J2 with the number of time-saving times set to 20, and time-saving pattern J3 with the number of time-saving times set to 1. However, this is not limited to these, and other time-saving patterns with different numbers of time-saving times may be provided.
Specifically, in addition to these time-saving symbols, a time-saving symbol J4 with the number of time-saving times set to 30, a time-saving symbol J5 with the number of time-saving times set to 50, a time-saving symbol J6 with the number of time-saving times set to 10,000, etc. may be provided. Also, only one type of time-saving symbol with a predetermined number of time-saving times may be provided as a time-saving symbol that can be determined when a time-saving award is won.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variety of time-saving game states that can be set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increasing the player's interest.
Also, the number of time-saving times to be set may be predetermined for each type of time-saving symbol as described above, or may be predetermined for each type of time-saving symbol and the set game state. For example, in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, or when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times, but in the time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 times, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the number of time-saving times is set to 0 times (i.e., the time-saving game state is set and at the same time, the time-saving game state is set to end).
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the number of time-saving times that can be set can be varied to provide a more innovative gaming experience and increase the player's interest.
In addition, if the pachinko machine is set up so that the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 and the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 can result in a winning or losing lottery for the time-shortened bonus in either case, the probability of winning the time-shortened bonus in the win or lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 may be different from the probability of winning the time-shortened bonus in the win or lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 (for example, the probability of winning the time-shortened bonus in the win or lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 is 1/100, and the probability of winning the time-shortened bonus in the win or lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 is 1/10).
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the degree of advantage regarding the setting of the time-saving game state changes for each starting winning port into which the game ball enters, thereby increasing the player's interest.
Also, depending on the type of the time-saving symbol determined, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the normal symbol opening time, which is the time from when the normal symbol is selected as a winning symbol and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed until the movable piece 16b opens (the second start winning hole 16 opens), may be set to be different. For example, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 0.5 seconds, in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 1.0 seconds, and in the time-saving game state set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J3, the normal symbol opening time may be set to 1.5 seconds.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the advantageous degree of the time-saving game state that is set changes for each determined time-saving pattern, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the time-saving grant can be derived as a result of the judgment in the win/lose lottery, and if the time-saving grant is won, a time-saving play state (first time-saving play state) is set. However, instead of deriving the winning of the time-saving grant as a result of the judgment in the win/lose lottery, a special pattern (i.e., a small win pattern or a losing pattern) that can be determined based on a judgment result other than a big win in the win/lose lottery (i.e., a small win or a losing pattern) may be used as the time-saving pattern, and whether or not the time-saving play state can be set (whether or not the time-saving grant is won) may be determined depending on the type of special pattern determined as described above.

For example, in the case where the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing random number results in a losing result, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 20 may be set, and when the losing symbol Z2 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time-saving game state may not be set. Also, the losing symbols that can be determined by the special symbol random number are not limited to these, and there may be losing symbols that set a first time-saving game state with a number of time-saving times different from that of the losing symbol Z1 (for example, a losing symbol Z3 in which a first time-saving game state with a number of time-saving times of 50 is set, a losing symbol Z4 in which a first time-saving game state with a number of time-saving times of 10,000 is set, etc.).
In addition, rather than determining the losing symbol by the process of drawing a winning/losing lottery and determining the special symbol, as in the above-mentioned variant example (2), in a winning/losing lottery based on a winning/losing random number, for example, a losing symbol corresponding to a losing symbol Z1 for which the setting of the first time-shortened game state and the number of time-shortened times is determined to be 20, and a losing symbol corresponding to a losing symbol Z2 for which it is determined that the first time-shortened game state will not be set can be set so that if the winning/losing lottery results in a losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol Z1, the first time-shortened game state with the number of time-shortened times being 20 is set, and if the winning/losing lottery results in a losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol Z2, the first time-shortened game state will not be set.

Also, for example, in the case where a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery based on a win/lose random number, when the small prize pattern Y1 is determined by the special pattern random number, a first time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is set to 50 is set, and when the small prize pattern Y2 is determined by the special pattern random number, the first time-saving game state may not be set. Also, the small prize patterns that can be determined by the special pattern random number are not limited to these, and small prize patterns that set a first time-saving game state with a different number of time-saving times from the small prize pattern Y1 (for example, small prize pattern Y3 in which a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of 80 times is set, small prize pattern Z4 in which a first time-saving game state with a time-saving number of 10,000 times is set, etc.) may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the small prize pattern by the process of drawing a win/lose lottery and determining the special pattern, as in the above-mentioned variant example (2), in the win/lose lottery based on a win/lose random number, for example, it is possible to derive a small prize winning corresponding to small prize pattern Y1 for which the setting of the first time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times 50 are determined, and a small prize winning corresponding to small prize pattern Y2 for which it is determined that the first time-saving game state will not be set, and if the win/lose lottery results in a small prize winning corresponding to small prize pattern Y1, the first time-saving game state with the number of time-saving times 50 is set, and if the win/lose lottery results in a small prize winning corresponding to small prize pattern Y2, the first time-saving game state will not be set.
In this case, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and a time-saving game state can be set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game by using special patterns such as small win patterns and miss patterns that have been used in the past, without the need to provide a new time-saving pattern as a special pattern, thereby simplifying the development process of pachinko machines.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is determined based on the result of a win/loss lottery based on a win/loss random number to determine whether or not time-shortened game state can be set. However, the control over the determination of whether or not a time-shortened game state can be set is not limited to this.
For example, a time-saving pattern random number may be provided which is a dedicated random number for determining whether or not a time-saving game state can be set, separate from the win/loss random number and special pattern random number, and a time-saving pattern lottery may be held based on the time-saving pattern random number to determine whether or not a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set, separate from the win/loss lottery and the determination of the special pattern, and based on the result of the time-saving pattern lottery it may be determined whether or not a time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) can be set and the number of time-saving times when a time-saving game state is set.
In other words, a win/loss lottery is conducted based on a win/loss random number, and a special pattern is determined based on the result of the win/loss lottery, and a time-saving pattern lottery is conducted based on the time-saving pattern random number to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set (the time-saving pattern described below).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a time-saving pattern random number, which is a random number exclusively for the time-saving pattern lottery described above, within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65,535) is obtained along with the above-mentioned first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number, and a time-saving pattern lottery is performed to determine the type of time-saving pattern that determines whether or not a time-saving game state can be set based on the obtained time-saving pattern random number.
More specifically, a time-saving symbol random number determination table is provided for determining the type of time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery. This time-saving symbol random number determination table may be provided for each type of start winning hole into which the game ball entered (first start winning hole 15, second start winning hole 16). When the set game state is the normal game state, the time-saving symbol lottery is performed by referring to a predetermined time-saving symbol random number determination table, and the type of the time-saving symbol is determined.

The time-saving symbol may be a time-saving winning symbol that is determined to be a winning symbol for time-saving grant (i.e., to set a time-saving game state) or a time-saving non-winning symbol that is determined to be a non-winning symbol for time-saving grant (i.e., to not set a time-saving game state). In addition, the time-saving symbol may be a plurality of types of time-saving winning symbols that are determined to have different times of time-saving (for example, a time-saving winning symbol JA1 that is determined to have 10 times of time-saving grant, a time-saving winning symbol JA2 that is determined to have 20 times of time-saving grant, etc.).
Then, when any of the time-saving winning symbols is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery, for example, the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set, and the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving winning symbol is set. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues without winning the jackpot until the result of the lottery for the set number of time-saving times is derived. On the other hand, when a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined, the normal game state remains.
In addition, when the set game state is other than the normal game state (first low probability time-saving game state, second low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state), the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may not be performed and the non-winning time-saving symbol may be forcibly determined. This means that a new time-saving game state will not be set in game states other than the normal game state.

In addition, as described above, when the type of time-saving pattern is set to be determined by a time-saving pattern lottery based on a time-saving pattern random number, the time-saving pattern lottery and the time-saving pattern may be set to be controlled in the same manner as the win/lose lottery and special patterns in the above-mentioned embodiment.
For example, the obtained time-saving pattern random number may be stored in the same reserved memory area as the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number obtained as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, and may be set to be able to be reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) in the same way as the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number.
In addition, when the time-saving pattern is determined as described above, a setting may be made so that a time-saving pattern variation display (hereinafter also referred to as variation of the time-saving pattern) is performed in a predetermined display device (time-saving pattern display device) different from the first special pattern display device 30 and the second special pattern display device 31, similar to the special pattern. The time-saving pattern variation display may be set to start at the same timing as the special pattern variation display, or may be set to have the same variation time as the special pattern variation display. In addition, when the special pattern variation display and the time-saving pattern variation display are started at the same timing, a setting may be made so that a time-saving pattern lottery is performed at the start of the variation display.

In addition, when a winning time-saving symbol is determined in the time-saving symbol lottery described above, if the win/lose lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery results in a loss, the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) may be set after the special symbol based on the win/lose lottery has stopped changing (when the next special symbol starts changing).In addition, when a small prize is won in the win/lose lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving game state may be set after the small prize game based on the small prize win has ended (when the first special symbol starts changing after the small prize game has ended).

In contrast, when a time-saving winning pattern is determined in the time-saving pattern lottery described above, and a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving pattern lottery, the time-saving game state is not set based on the time-saving winning pattern, and after the special game based on the jackpot win ends (when the first special pattern starts to change after the special game ends), the game state may be set according to the type of jackpot pattern determined based on the jackpot win. In other words, if the time-saving winning pattern and the jackpot pattern (jackpot win) overlap, the time-saving winning pattern may be invalidated, and the game state may be set based on the jackpot pattern. If the game state setting based on the time-saving winning pattern is performed with priority over the special game, the game state at the time of the jackpot win may change, and the game state after the special game must be set after checking whether or not there is a change, which may make the game state setting process complicated, but by doing as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent such a situation from occurring.

In addition, the change pattern command, the manner of the change presentation, the manner of the pre-reading presentation, etc. may be determined based on the results of determining the special pattern and the time-saving pattern.
Specifically, the variation pattern command and the variation performance mode corresponding to each of the following cases may be determined: when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win or a loss of a small prize and a time-saving winning pattern is determined; when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win or a loss of a small prize and a time-saving non-winning pattern is determined; and when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win of a big prize (when a time-saving non-winning pattern is determined). For example, when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win or a loss of a small prize and a time-saving winning pattern is determined, or when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win of a big prize, the determination rate of the variation pattern command associated with a long variation time may be set to be higher than when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a win or a loss of a small prize and a time-saving non-winning pattern is determined, or the determination rate of the variation performance mode or the pre-reading performance mode in which the expectation of winning a big prize or winning a time-saving prize is set to be high may be set to be higher.

In addition, even if the type of time-saving symbol is determined by a lottery based on a random number of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed in a game state other than the normal game state to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state. The various controls in this case are the same as those in (6) above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, rather than determining both whether or not the time-saving game state can be set and the number of times the time-saving mode can be activated in the time-saving pattern lottery based on the time-saving pattern random number, the time-saving pattern lottery based on the time-saving pattern random number may determine only whether or not the time-saving game state can be set, and if it is decided to set the time-saving game state, a lottery may be held to determine the number of times the time-saving mode can be activated based on another random number (a time-saving mode determination random number) different from the above-mentioned time-saving pattern random number.

In addition, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed using other random numbers instead of using the time-saving symbol random numbers.
For example, instead of using a single win/lose random number to determine both whether a jackpot has been won and whether a small jackpot has been won, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a jackpot determination random number that is used only to determine whether a jackpot has been won, a small jackpot determination random number that is used only to determine whether a small jackpot has been won, and a loss determination random number that is used only to determine whether a loss has been won can be separately provided, and a determination can be made for each random number to derive a determination result of whether a jackpot has been won, a small jackpot has been won, or a loss, and the above-mentioned time-saving pattern lottery can be performed based on one of these random numbers to determine whether a time-saving game state can be set and the number of times the time can be saved.

In addition, instead of determining the jackpot pattern, small win pattern, or losing pattern by one special pattern random number as in the above embodiment, a jackpot pattern determination random number used only to determine the type of jackpot pattern in the case of a jackpot, a small win pattern determination random number used only to determine the type of small win pattern in the case of a small win, and a losing pattern determination random number used only to determine the type of losing pattern in the case of a losing game may be separately provided, and the type of jackpot pattern, small win pattern, or losing pattern may be determined based on one of the random numbers according to the result of the jackpot, small win, or losing judgment, and a time-saving pattern lottery may be held based on one of these random numbers to determine whether or not to set a time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times.

In addition, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, in a pachinko machine P having multiple setting values associated with settings related to ball output, a time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based on either a random number used in a lottery set to have a different lottery probability depending on the setting value (e.g., a win/lose random number, a big win determination random number, a small win determination random number, a miss determination random number, etc.), or a random number used in a lottery set to have the same lottery probability regardless of the setting value (e.g., a special symbol random number, etc.), to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set and the number of time-saving times. Also, instead of performing a time-saving symbol lottery based on a random number used in a lottery set to have a different lottery probability depending on the setting value, a time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based only on a random number used in a lottery set to have the same lottery probability regardless of the setting value, to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set and the number of time-saving times.

When set up as above, it provides the same effects as the above-mentioned embodiment, and also provides a wide range of control methods for setting the time-saving game state, making it possible to set the time-saving game state according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when a high-probability game state is set, a jackpot is then won and a special pattern (jackpot pattern X4) for setting a low-probability game state is determined, whereby the high-probability game state ends and a low-probability game state is set. However, the control of the transition to the low-probability game state is not limited to this.
For example, after a high probability game state is set, if a predetermined number of high probability game state (for example, 80 times) of winning/losing lotteries are performed without winning a jackpot, the high probability game state may be terminated (configured as a so-called ST type pachinko machine). In addition, in a pachinko machine set in this way, if a game state combining a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state can be set, during the game state, when a time-saving symbol is determined by a winning/losing lottery as in the above-mentioned embodiment, when a small winning symbol or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state is determined as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), or when a time-saving winning symbol is determined by a time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modified example (9), the time-saving game state may be set based on the determination.
Also, for example, a fall lottery random number used in a fall lottery that determines whether or not to end the high probability game state and set a low probability game state may be set, and when a fall lottery based on this fall lottery random number determines that the high probability game state is to be ended and a low probability game state is to be set, the high probability game state may be ended. In addition, when a fall lottery random number is set, a time-saving symbol lottery like the above-mentioned modified example (9) may be performed based on the fall lottery random number to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state.
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and a wide variety of control methods are available for setting the time-saving game state, making it possible to set the time-saving game state in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the process of determining the result of the lottery was performed in the following order: determination of whether a big win was awarded → determination of whether a small win was awarded → determination of whether a time-saving bonus was awarded; however, the order of determination is not limited to this.
For example, the determination may be made in the following order: determining whether a big win has been achieved, → determining whether a time-saving bonus has been awarded, → determining whether a small win has been achieved.
Also, as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), in the winning/losing lottery, instead of deriving a judgment result of winning the time-saving bonus, it is possible to derive the winning of a small prize corresponding to a small prize pattern for which it is determined that a time-saving game state is set (hereinafter also referred to as a small prize with time-saving), or the winning of a small prize corresponding to a small prize pattern for which it is determined that a time-saving game state is not set (hereinafter also referred to as a small prize without time-saving), and in a pachinko machine in which the time-saving game state is set when a small prize with time-saving is won, and the time-saving game state is not set when a small prize without time-saving is won, for example, the judgment may be made in the order of: judgment of winning or losing a jackpot → judgment of winning or losing a small prize with time-saving → judgment of winning or losing a small prize without time-saving, or judgment of winning or losing a jackpot → judgment of winning or losing a small prize without time-saving → judgment of winning or losing a small prize with time-saving.
Also, as in the above-mentioned variant example (8), in the winning/losing lottery, rather than deriving a judgment result of whether or not a time-shortening bonus has been awarded, it is possible to derive a losing result corresponding to a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-shortening game state (hereinafter also referred to as a losing result with time-shortening) or a losing result corresponding to a losing symbol that is determined to not set a time-shortening game state (hereinafter also referred to as a losing result without time-shortening), and in a pachinko machine in which a time-shortening game state is set when a losing result with time-shortening is obtained, and a time-shortening game state is not set when a losing result without time-shortening is obtained, the judgments may be made in the following order, for example: judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded → judgment of whether or not a small jackpot has been awarded → judgment of whether or not a loss with time-shortening is obtained, or judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded → judgment of whether or not a loss with time-shortening is obtained → judgment of whether or not a small jackpot has been awarded
In addition, in pachinko machines that are set up to determine whether or not a high probability game state will end by a fall-out lottery, the lottery processing may be carried out in the following order: fall-out lottery → win/loss lottery (determination of whether or not a jackpot has been awarded, determination of whether or not a small jackpot has been awarded, determination of whether or not a time-saving bonus has been awarded).

In addition, as in the above-mentioned modified example (9), in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and does not have a multi-stage setting value, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of time-saving symbol lottery → win/lose lottery, or the win/lose lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and has a multi-stage setting value, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of time-saving symbol lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) → win/lose lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the setting value).
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and to determine whether or not a high-probability game state can be ended by a fall lottery and that does not have multiple set values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of fall lottery → time-saving symbol lottery → winning/losing lottery, or the lottery processing may be performed in the order of fall lottery → winning/losing lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery and to determine whether or not a high-probability game state can be ended by a fall lottery and that has multiple set values, the lottery processing may be performed in the order of fall lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value) → time-saving symbol lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the set value) → winning/losing lottery (lottery set so that the lottery probability differs depending on the set value).

When set up as above, it provides the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment, and also enables a lottery to be held at a time according to the specifications of the pachinko machine to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game mode.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, a special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot. However, the trigger for executing the special game is not limited to this.
For example, in a small prize game that is executed not only when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a big prize, but also when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a predetermined small prize (when a predetermined small prize pattern is determined), a specific large prize opening with a special area into which a game ball can enter is opened, and a special game may be executed even if a game ball that entered the specific large prize opening during the small prize game enters the special area (configured as a so-called one-type two-type mixed pachinko machine). Also, after the special game executed based on the above-mentioned small prize winning is finished, it may be set to transition to a game state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) corresponding to the small prize pattern determined at the time of the above-mentioned small prize winning.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine configured as described above (a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine), similarly to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, it may be configured to perform the following: judgment of whether or not a time-saving feature has been awarded (the win/loss lottery in the above-described embodiment and modified example (2)); determination of the small winning symbol or losing symbol for which the time-saving game state can be set (the win/loss lottery and special symbol determination processing in modified example (8) above); determination of the time-saving winning symbol or non-winning symbol for the time-saving game state (the time-saving symbol lottery in modified example (9) above) (hereinafter, these judgments and determinations are collectively referred to as the time-saving award determination processing), so that the time-saving game state can be set without going through the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game.
For example, in the case of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery being performed on a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving symbol lottery determines that a time-saving game state is to be set (a time-saving symbol (a time-saving winning symbol) that is determined to set a time-saving game state) and the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (a losing symbol is determined), the time-saving game state is set according to the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning/losing lottery has stopped, and when the time-saving game state is set according to the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and the winning/losing lottery results in a small win (a small win symbol is determined), the time-saving game state is not set according to the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and after the small win game and special game based on the small win are completed, a game state corresponding to the type of small win symbol determined based on the small win may be set.
Specifically, if a time-saving pattern (time-saving winning pattern) associated with setting a first time-saving game state (time-saving number of times is 20) is determined by the above-mentioned time-saving pattern lottery, and a small prize is won in the win/lose lottery, and a small prize pattern associated with setting a second time-saving game state (time-saving number of times is 100) is determined after the small prize game and special game are completed, then the first time-saving game state is not set and the second time-saving game state is set after the small prize game and special game are completed.
In this case, in addition to achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment, pachinko machines of various specifications can be equipped with a lottery function that determines whether or not to set the time-saving play state, and it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the process of setting the time-saving play state becomes complicated when a small jackpot is won and the decision to set the time-saving play state overlaps.

(13) If multiple types of determination results are provided as the determination results that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving awarding determination process, a time-saving game state may be set for each determination result, with different processing contents for making it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state.
For example, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the time-saving symbol for setting the time-saving game state is set to be determined by the process of the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special symbol, or when the time-saving symbol for setting the time-saving game state (time-saving winning symbol) is set to be determined by the time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modified example (9), the types of the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) that can be determined include the symbol for setting the first time-saving game state described above, and the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbol is higher than that of the non-time-saving game state, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the second start winning port are higher than those of the non-time-saving game state. A symbol for setting a third time-saving game state in which the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is the same as that of the non-time-saving game state, a symbol for setting a fourth time-saving game state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is longer than that of the non-time-saving game state but the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are the same as that of the non-time-saving game state, a symbol for setting a fifth time-saving game state in which the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is longer than that of the non-time-saving game state but the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as that of the non-time-saving game state, etc. may be provided. In addition to these, a symbol for setting a time-saving game state in which any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are higher (or longer) than those of the non-time-saving game state but the other one is the same as that of the non-time-saving game state may be provided.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modified example (2), the same setting can be made even when the result of the winning/losing lottery can be derived as the winning of the time-saving grant corresponding to a predetermined time-saving symbol. For example, the winning/losing lottery can be set so that the result of the winning of the time-saving grant corresponding to the time-saving symbol determined to set the above-mentioned third time-saving game state, the winning of the time-saving grant corresponding to the time-saving symbol determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-saving game state, etc. can be derived.

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), when it is set so that the possibility of setting a time-shortened game state is determined by a small win pattern or a losing pattern determined in the process of the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special pattern, it is possible to provide a small win pattern Y1 (or a losing pattern Z1) that is determined to set the above-mentioned first time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y3 (or a losing pattern Z3) that is determined to set the above-mentioned third time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y4 (or a losing pattern Z4) that is determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-shortened game state, a small win pattern Y5 (or a losing pattern Z5) that is determined to set the above-mentioned fifth time-shortened game state, etc. In addition to these, a small winning pattern (or a losing pattern) may be provided that is determined to set a time-saving game state in which any two of the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are higher (or longer) than in the non-time-saving game state, but the other one is the same as the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modified example (8), the same setting can be made even when the result of the winning/losing lottery can be derived as a winning of a small prize corresponding to a small prize pattern determined to set a time-saving game state, or a losing result corresponding to a losing pattern determined to set a time-saving game state. For example, the winning/losing lottery can be set to be capable of deriving a result such as a winning of a small prize corresponding to the small prize pattern Y3 determined to set the above-mentioned third time-saving game state (or a losing result corresponding to the losing pattern Z3), a winning of a small prize corresponding to the small prize pattern Y4 determined to set the above-mentioned fourth time-saving game state (or a losing result corresponding to the losing pattern Z4), etc.

When configured as described above, it is possible to achieve the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment, and also to provide a wide variety of processing options to make it easier to maintain the second start winning hole 16 in an open state in the time-saving game state that is set without the need for a jackpot or special game, thereby providing more innovative gameplay and increasing the player's interest.

(14) The type and number of symbols (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small win symbols, losing symbols, etc.) that are determined to set a time-saving game state that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving grant determination process may be set to be different for each game state.
For example, in the case where there are a predetermined number of patterns (e.g., five types) that are determined to set a time-saving play state (time-saving patterns, time-saving winning patterns, small winning patterns, losing patterns, etc.), it may be set so that all types can be determined in the normal play state, but only one or more types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving play state, or it may be set so that all types can be determined in the low-probability time-saving play state, but only one or more types can be determined in the normal play state.
Also, for example, it may be set so that all types can be determined in a specific time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state), but only one or more types can be determined in a time-saving game state other than the specific one (for example, the third time-saving game state).
When set as above, it produces the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment, and also makes it possible to vary the rate at which a time-saving game state is set and the types of time-saving game states that can be set for each game state, thereby making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay and increase the player's interest.

(15) When the type of small win pattern or losing pattern is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set, the variation pattern may be determined according to the type of small win pattern or losing pattern that has been determined.
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and when a time-saving game state is set without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, a wide variety of variable effects can be executed.

(16) In the case where the setting is made so that the possibility of setting a time-saving game state is determined based on the type of small winning symbol or losing symbol, the time-saving game state may be set according to the number of times a small winning symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state or the number of times a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state is determined within a specified period (for example, from a specified start point until 100 win/lose lotteries have been held).
For example, when a small winning symbol Y1 (a small winning symbol for which it is determined that a first time-saving game state with 20 time-saving times is set) is determined a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, the time-saving game state determined for the small winning symbol Y1 may be set. Also, when a losing symbol Z1 (a small winning symbol for which it is determined that a first time-saving game state with 50 time-saving times is set) is determined a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, the time-saving game state determined for the losing symbol Z1 may be set.
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the conditions for setting the time-saving game state can be varied to provide a more innovative gaming experience.

(17) In a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, when a time-shortened game state is set based on the type of small win pattern, the number of time-shortened increments of the time-shortened game state set after a small win game based on the determination of a small win pattern that has been determined to set a time-shortened game state may be the same or different when the game ball enters a special area provided in a specific large prize opening during a small win game based on the determination of a small win pattern that has been determined to set a time-shortened game state and when the game ball does not enter the special area provided in the specific large prize opening during the small win game.
For example, in the case where a small win pattern Y1 is determined which is determined to set a first time-saving game state with 20 time-saving cycles, when the game ball enters a special area during a small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1, the first time-saving game state with 20 time-saving cycles may be set after the small win game and the special game are completed, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, the first time-saving game state with 20 time-saving cycles may be set after the small win game is completed.
Also, for example, when the above-mentioned small win pattern Y1 is determined, during the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1, if the game ball enters a special area, a first time-saving game state with a time-saving count of 20 times may be set after the small win game and the special game are completed, and if the game ball does not enter the special area, a first time-saving game state with a time-saving count of 5 times may be set after the small win game is completed.
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can land in the special area, thereby providing a wide variety of gameplay.

(18) When setting a time-saving play state when a small win is won in the win/lose lottery (when the small win pattern is determined), the time-saving play state may be set at any timing from the time when the small win is won (determination of the small win pattern) to the end of the small win game based on the small win (for example, when the small win is won, when the small win pattern starts to change, when the small win pattern ends to change, at the start of the small win game based on the small win pattern, during the small win game, at the end of the small win game (when the first special pattern starts to change after the small win game ends), etc.).
Similarly, when setting a time-saving play state when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (when the losing symbol is determined), the time-saving play state may be set at any time from the time when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (when the losing symbol is determined) to the end of the fluctuation based on that loss (for example, the time when the losing lottery result is derived, when the losing symbol starts to change, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends (when the next special symbol starts to change), etc.).
Even when set in this manner, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variety of transitions to the time-saving game state can be increased, thereby increasing the variety of gameplay.

(19) In the case where the setting is made so that the possibility of setting a time-shortened game state is determined based on the type of small win or losing symbol, the number of times that time can be shortened in the time-shortened game state may be set to a predetermined number of times that correspond to the type of small win or losing symbol, or a lottery may be held to determine the number of times that time can be shortened when transitioning to the time-shortened game state, and the number of times that time can be shortened determined by the lottery may be set.
Even in this case, the same effect as in the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and the method of determining the number of times the time-saving feature is to be determined can be varied, making it possible to determine the number of times the time-saving feature is to be determined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(20) In the case where the setting is made so that the possibility of setting a time-saving game state is determined based on the type of small win pattern or missing pattern, the performance of the time-saving game state to be set (the difficulty level at which the second start winning port 16 is maintained in the open state) may be made different depending on the type of small win pattern or missing pattern determined.
For example, when a small winning symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined, a time-saving game state A is set in which the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the normal game state (one or more of the following settings are set: a setting with a high probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols, a setting with a long fluctuation time for normal symbols, and a setting with a long opening time for the second start winning port 16), and when a small winning symbol Y3 (or a losing symbol Z3) is determined, a time-saving game state B is set in which the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be maintained in an open state than in the time-saving game state A.
In addition, the performance of the time-saving game state that is set may be made different depending on the type of small win symbol or losing symbol and the set game state.
For example, when a small win pattern Y1 (or a losing pattern Z1) is determined in the normal game state, the above-mentioned time-saving game state A is set, but when a small win pattern Y1 (or a losing pattern Z1) is determined in the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned time-saving game state B may be set.
Even in the above-described case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the performance of the time-saving game state that can be set can be varied to provide more innovative gameplay.

(21) When a time-saving game state is set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may be ended on the condition of winning a big win without setting an upper limit on the number of time-saving times (i.e., the number of time-saving times is infinite), or a lottery (lottery for a time-saving ending symbol) may be held to determine a time-saving ending symbol that is determined to end the time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state may be ended on the condition that the time-saving ending symbol is determined by the lottery. Also, the time-saving game state may be ended on the condition that a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is determined, and a new time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times based on the determination may be set (overwritten).
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the conditions for terminating the time-saving game state can be made more varied, resulting in more innovative gameplay.

(22) In a pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter) in which a time-saving game state cannot be set as the next game state when the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit (a non-time-saving game state is forcibly set), when a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small win symbol or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving game state is displayed in a stopped state during normal game mode, the number of consecutive time-saving settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
Also, in the time-saving game state, when a time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small winning pattern or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state is displayed in a stopped state, the number of consecutive time-saving settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
In addition, even if a time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small win pattern or a losing pattern which is determined to set a time-saving game state when determined during a normal game state but is determined not to set a time-saving game state when determined during a time-saving game state is displayed stopped during the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned number of consecutive time-saving settings may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
In the above-described case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the difficulty level at which the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit can be changed, thereby providing more innovative gameplay.

(23) In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving game state, which is set based on the determination of a time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small winning pattern or a missing pattern for which a time-saving game state is set, (one or more of the winning probability of a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of a normal pattern, the opening time of the second start winning port 16, and the number of times of time-saving) may be made different depending on the number of consecutive times remaining until the number of times of time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, or may be made the same regardless of the number of times remaining.
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variety of time-saving game states that can be set in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(24) In a pachinko machine configured such that a fall-out lottery is conducted and a time-shortened game state is set by determining a time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern or a missing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, when a fall-out lottery determines that a high-probability game state will be ended and a time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern or a missing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, the number of time-shortened game patterns to be set based on the determination of the patterns may be set to the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the fall-out lottery and the number of time-shortened game patterns determined according to the type of pattern determined, or may be set to the game state before the above-mentioned determination by the fall-out lottery and the number of time-shortened game patterns determined according to the type of pattern determined.
In this case as well, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the number of time-saving times that can be set in the time-saving game state can be made more varied, resulting in more innovative gameplay.

(25) When a pre-reading effect that notifies the result of a win/lose lottery is being executed, if a time-saving pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state is determined, the pre-reading effect being executed may be continued, or the pre-reading effect may be discontinued without being continued.
In addition, when a hold that determines a time-saving pattern, a small winning pattern, or a losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state is stored, the execution of a specific effect (such as a look-ahead effect or a specified effect executed during a variable effect based on the other hold) targeting other holds may be restricted, and if a specific effect targeting the other hold is already being executed, the specific effect being executed may be continued or may be discontinued without continuing.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not a time-saving game state can be set by the above-mentioned time-saving pattern lottery and that is set to execute a pre-reading performance that notifies the result of the time-saving pattern lottery, control similar to that described above may also be performed.
Even in this case, the same effect as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and appropriate presentation can be executed according to the situation of the determination of the time-saving pattern, small win pattern or losing pattern that is determined to set the time-saving game state.

(26) In a pachinko machine in which the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot can be set to a high-probability game state, the probability A1 that the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a low-probability game state will be set to a high-probability game state, and the probability A2 that the game state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a high-probability game state will be set to a high-probability game state may be set to the same value or to different values.
The above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) used in the winning/losing lottery, or may be set to be different values depending on the type of special random number. The above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special pattern determined when a jackpot is won, or may be set to be different values depending on the type of special pattern. The above-mentioned probabilities A1 and A2 may be set to be different values depending on the type of special random number used in the winning/losing lottery and the type of special pattern determined when a jackpot is won.
When set in this manner, there is a wide variation in the probability that a high probability game state is set from a low probability game state through the execution of a special game, and that a high probability game state is set again from a high probability game state through the execution of a special game, and therefore the gameplay that can be provided to the player can be made more varied.

(27) In a pachinko machine that can end a high-probability game state and set a low-probability game state by a fall-out lottery, the determination probability B of ending the high-probability game state and setting a low-probability game state may be set to only one value or to multiple values.
If only one value is set, the fall-out lottery is always conducted using that value, and if multiple values are set, the fall-out lottery may be conducted using any of the values depending on the situation (for example, depending on the number of times the special pattern has changed since the high probability game state was set, the type of starting winning slot into which the game ball entered, etc.).
The determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the set game state (high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state combining the high probability game state and the non-time-saving game state). The determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) used in the winning/losing lottery, or may be set to be different depending on the type of special random number. The determination probability B may be set to be the same regardless of the type of special pattern (losing pattern) determined in the case of a loss, or may be set to be different depending on the type of special pattern. The determination probability B may be set to be different depending on the set game state, the type of special random number used in the winning/losing lottery, and the type of special pattern determined in the case of a loss.
When set in this manner, the probability that a high probability game state ends and a low probability game state is set can be varied, and the gameplay that can be provided to the player can be made more varied.

(28) In a pachinko machine (hereinafter, referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a probability change limiter) that is set so that a low probability game state is forcibly set after the end of a special game when the number of consecutive high probability settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, only one value or multiple values may be set as the upper limit. If only one value is set, the above-mentioned setting may be performed when the number of consecutive high probability settings reaches that value, and if multiple values are set, the above-mentioned setting may be performed when the number of consecutive high probability settings reaches any value according to the situation (for example, according to the number of times a low probability game state has been shifted to a high probability game state, etc.).
Similarly, in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the upper limit number may be set to only one value or multiple values. If only one value is set, the above-mentioned setting is performed when the continuous time-saving setting number reaches that value, and if multiple values are set, the above-mentioned setting may be performed when the continuous time-saving setting number reaches any value according to the situation (for example, according to the number of times a non-time-saving game state has been switched to a time-saving game state).
When set in this manner, there will be a wide variety of options for the upper limit of the number of consecutive high probability settings and the number of consecutive time-saving settings, and the gameplay that can be provided to the player will be more varied.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the time-shortened game state is set when the time-shortened game state is determined to be a win or loss in a lottery during the normal game state, but the trigger for setting the time-shortened game state is not limited to this.
For example, the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived in the win/lose lottery) may be counted, and if the game state when the count value reaches a predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving feature is other than the time-saving game state (normal game state or high probability non-time-saving game state), a time-saving game state in which the number of times the time-saving feature is activated becomes a specific number of times TN, without the need for winning a jackpot or playing a special game.
In this setting, even if a big win is not won, the time-saving game state is set if the number of times the special symbols change reaches the time-saving activation count LN, so that the number of variations in which the time-saving game state can be set is increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

(30) In a pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned modified example (29), the above-mentioned count value may be cleared at any one or more of the following times: (a) when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared); (b) when the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal game state reaches the time-saving activation count LN, or when the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal game state reaches the time-saving activation count LN and then a lottery is held to determine whether a specific time-saving activation count TN has been won without a jackpot being won (when the time-saving game state set by reaching the time-saving activation count LN ends); (c) when a jackpot is won or when a special game based on a jackpot is ended; (d) when the time-saving game state is set in a pachinko machine in which a time-saving game state is set by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small win symbol, or a losing symbol that is set to set the time-saving game state; and (e) when the RAM is cleared by executing a change of the setting value in a pachinko machine in which a setting value is set. That is, the counting of the above-mentioned count value may be started from the points (a) to (e). Note that the clearing at the point (c) may be set to be always executed.
Also, the count value may be cleared at a time point other than (a) to (e).
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may be set to always be counted regardless of the set game state, or may not be counted during a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, during a high probability game state, a time-saving game state, etc.).
In addition, the timing for counting the above-mentioned count value may be any time from the time when the winning/losing lottery results in a loss (when the losing pattern is determined) to the end of the variation based on the loss (for example, the time when the losing lottery result is derived, when the losing pattern starts to vary, when the losing pattern ends to vary, the time when the stopped display time has elapsed after the variation of the losing pattern ends (when the next special pattern starts to vary), etc.), or when the winning/losing lottery results in a jackpot (when the jackpot pattern is determined), it may be any of the above-mentioned times or the end of the special game based on the winning jackpot, etc.
In addition, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set may be set to be the same as the timing at which the above-mentioned count value is counted.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned count value may, for example, during a normal game state, be set to count the variation in the special pattern based on the first special pattern random number that is mainly obtained during the normal game state, or may be set to count not only the variation in the special pattern based on the first special pattern random number but also the variation in the special pattern based on the second special pattern random number.
When set in this manner, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set can be varied, enhancing the interest of the player.

(31) In a pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN may be determined in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, and may be set to a value within a range that does not make the player too gambling-oriented (for example, if the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery is 1/P, then P x lower limit coefficient for activation (e.g., 2.5) ≦ number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN ≦ P x upper limit coefficient for activation (e.g., 3.0)). Also, it may be set to an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Also, the number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN may be set to only one value, or multiple values.
When multiple setting values corresponding to settings related to ball output are provided, a different number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature may be set for each setting value, or the same number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature may be set for any setting value (the number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot for any setting value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)).
When set in this manner, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-shortened gaming state from becoming too high, and to provide a wide variety of timing for setting the time-shortened gaming state.

(32) In a pachinko machine set as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the specific number of time-saving times TN may be determined in relation to the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, and may be set to a value within a range that does not make the game too gambling-like (for example, if the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/lose lottery is 1/P, then P x specific lower limit coefficient (for example, 0.4) ≦ specific number of time-saving times TN ≦ P x specific upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.8)). Also, it may be set to an appropriate value according to the game specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning the jackpot. Also, the specific number of time-saving times LN may be set to only one value, or multiple values.
In addition, the number of times the time-shortening occurs in the time-shortening game state, which is set based on winning a jackpot, and the number of times the time-shortening occurs in the time-shortening game state, which is set based on the determination of a pattern that is determined to set the time-shortening game state without winning a jackpot, may also be set to be within the above-mentioned range.
In addition, when multiple setting values corresponding to settings related to ball output are set, a different specific number of time-saving times TN may be set for each setting value, or the same specific number of time-saving times TN may be set for any setting value (a specific number of time-saving times TN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot for any setting value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)).
In addition, the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of times the special symbol changes reaching the time-saving activation number LN may be set to end by satisfying the same time-saving end condition as the time-saving game state that is set based on the winning of a jackpot or the determination of a symbol that is determined to set the time-saving game state. For example, the time-saving game state described above may be set to end when a jackpot is won or when a win/lose lottery is held a specific number of times TN for the time-saving game.
In addition, if multiple patterns are set as conditions for terminating the time-saving game state, for example, the sum of the number of times the special pattern changes based on the first special pattern random number and the number of times the special pattern changes based on the second special pattern random number reaches a specific time-saving number TN1, and the number of times the special pattern changes based on the second special pattern random number reaches a specific time-saving number TN2, both the specific time-saving numbers TN1 and TN2 may be set to fall within the above-mentioned range, or only either the specific time-saving number TN1 or TN2 may be set to fall within the above-mentioned range.
When set in this manner, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-saving game state from becoming too high, and to provide a wide variety of timing for the end of the set time-saving game state.

(33) In a pachinko machine set up as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN may have multiple time-saving game states with different processing contents for making it easier to maintain the second start winning port 16 in an open state, and one of the time-saving game states may be set depending on the situation.
Specifically, a first time-saving game state in the above-mentioned embodiment, a third time-saving game state, a fourth time-saving game state, a fifth time-saving game state, etc. in the above-mentioned modified example (13) are provided, and one of the time-saving game states may be set depending on, for example, the type of jackpot pattern when the last jackpot was won before the time-saving activation count LN was reached, the type of small jackpot pattern when the last small jackpot was won before the time-saving activation count LN was reached, or the type of jackpot pattern, small jackpot pattern, missing pattern, time-saving pattern, or time-saving winning pattern when the time-saving game state was set before the time-saving activation count LN was reached.
When set in this manner, the variation of the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN is increased, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

(34) In a pachinko machine in which the time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN as in the above-mentioned variant example (29), the time-saving game state may also be set based on the determination of a pattern (time-saving pattern, time-saving winning pattern, small win pattern, or missing pattern) that is determined to set the time-saving game state during the normal game state (low probability game state).
In a pachinko machine set up in this manner, the symbols determined to set a time-shortened play state are not determined during a time-shortened play state, but the symbols determined to set a time-shortened play state are determined only during a non-time-shortened play state, or the symbols determined to set a time-shortened play state may be determined even during a time-shortened play state.
In addition, if the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of times LN that the time-saving feature is activated during a normal game state (low probability game state) and at the same time the above-mentioned pattern is determined during a normal game state (low probability game state) (i.e., if the setting conditions for multiple time-saving game states are met simultaneously), one of the time-saving game states may be set.
Also, the above-mentioned count value may be set to be counted not only during the normal game state but also during the low probability time-saving game state and the high probability time-saving game state, and when the count value reaches the time-saving activation count LN during the low probability time-saving game state or the high probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may be reset. In this case, when the time-saving game state is reset, the time-saving count (i.e., the specific time-saving count TN) corresponding to the reset time-saving game state may be set again as the time-saving count, or the time-saving count corresponding to the reset time-saving game state may be added to the remaining time-saving count at that time. Also, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the time-saving activation count LN, the time-saving game state based on the reaching may be set after the time-saving game state set at that time is ended.
In this case, the variety of time-saving game states that can be set can be increased, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(35) Even in so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed pachinko machines, as in the above-mentioned modified example (29), the time-saving game state may be set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN.
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may be configured not to be cleared based on winning a small prize.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine set as described above, when the result of the win/lose lottery is a big win, a special game is executed, and when the result of the win/lose lottery is a predetermined small win, a small win game is executed when the special game is executed by a game ball entering a special area of a specific big prize opening, in the case where the special game is set to be executed by a game ball entering a special area of a specific big prize opening as in the above-mentioned modified examples (31) and (32), the probability P used to determine the number of time-saving activations LN and the number of specific time-saving activations TN may be any of the above-mentioned probability of winning the big win, the above-mentioned probability of winning the above-mentioned predetermined small win (the probability of winning the small win in the win/lose lottery based on the special chart random number mainly obtained during the non-time-saving game state), or the combined probability of the above-mentioned probability of winning the big win and the above-mentioned probability of winning the above-mentioned predetermined small win.
In addition, in the so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine set as described above, if the winning lottery does not result in a big win, and the special game is executed only when the game ball enters the special area of the specific big prize entry port in the small prize game that is executed when the winning lottery results in a predetermined small prize, as the probability P used to determine the number of times LN to activate the time-saving function or the number of times TN to activate the specific time-saving function as in the above-mentioned modified examples (31) and (32), either the probability of winning the above-mentioned specified small prize (the probability of winning the small prize in the winning lottery based on the special chart random number mainly obtained during the non-time-saving game state) or the probability of winning the specified small prize and having the game ball enter the special area (the probability of executing the special game via winning the specified small prize).
In addition, when a small prize is won, the number of times LN for activating the time-saving function may be updated or not updated depending on the type of the small prize pattern determined based on the winning prize.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, if the time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, and the time-saving game state is also set based on the determination of a time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small win pattern or a losing pattern that is specified to set the time-saving game state during the normal game state (low probability game state), when the above-mentioned count value reaches the time-saving activation count LN and the above-mentioned pattern is determined at the same time (i.e., when the setting conditions for multiple time-saving game states are met simultaneously), one of the time-saving game states may be set.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, in the case where a time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the time-saving activation count LN, and a predetermined small prize pattern is determined, and when a game ball enters a special area during a small prize game based on the small prize, after the end of the small prize game, instead of setting a time-saving game state based on the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, a game state determined for the predetermined small prize pattern (for example, a time-saving game state different from the time-saving game state based on reaching the time-saving activation count LN (a time-saving game state with a different difficulty level in which the second start winning hole 16 is maintained in an open state, a time-saving game state with a different number of time-saving times set, etc.)) may be set.
In addition, in a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of times the special symbol changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN, if a small prize is won by a win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the time-saving activation count LN and a predetermined small prize symbol is determined, but the game ball does not enter the special area during the small prize game based on the small prize, the time-saving game state may be set based on the number of times the special symbol changes reaching the time-saving activation count LN after the small prize game ends. If the above-mentioned time-saving game state is set during a small prize game, when the game ball enters the special area during the small prize game and a special game is executed, a process must be performed to end the set time-saving game state, but if it is set as described above, it is possible to prevent the complicated process of ending the set time-saving game state from being performed.
In the above-mentioned manner, it is possible to enrich the variety of time-saving game states that can be set in a type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

(36) In addition, the pachinko machine is provided with a time-saving game state, which is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot pattern for which the setting of the time-saving game state is determined (i.e., a time-saving game state set through the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game, hereinafter also referred to as a first time-saving game state), a time-saving game state set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations LN (i.e., a time-saving game state set when the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game are determined, hereinafter also referred to as a first time-saving game state), and a time-saving game state set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived, hereinafter also referred to as a first time-saving game state). a time-shortened game state that is set without going through the execution of a jackpot or special game, hereinafter also referred to as the second time-shortened game state), as well as a time-shortened game state that is set based on the determination of a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, the time-shortened winning pattern, the small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, the losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) (i.e., a time-shortened game state that is set without going through the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game, hereinafter also referred to as the third time-shortened game state).
By doing so, the variety of time-saving game states that can be set is increased, which can increase the player's interest.

(37) In addition, in the above-mentioned first time reduction, the setting may be made such that the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state). In addition, in the above-mentioned second time reduction, the setting may be made such that the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state). In addition, in the above-mentioned third time reduction, the setting may be made such that the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is the same as in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is longer than in the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state).
In addition, the first time-saving mode among the first, second and third time-saving modes may be set so that only in the first time-saving mode, the probability of winning in the lottery for the normal symbols is higher than in the normal game mode (non-time-saving game mode).
In this way, the degree of advantage of each time-saving game state can be changed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(38) In addition, in the case where a pachinko machine is equipped with a first time reduction, a second time reduction, and a third time reduction, when a jackpot pattern for which a time-reduction game state is set during the first time reduction is determined, (1a) the first time reduction may be ended, and the first time reduction may be newly set after the special game is ended. In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes during the first time reduction (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for which time reduction is activated, (2a) the first time reduction may be ended, and a second time reduction may be newly set, (2b) the first time reduction may be continued, or (2c) if the number of times the time reduction is set when the second time reduction is set is greater than the number of times the time reduction is remaining in the first time reduction, the first time reduction may be ended, and a second time reduction may be newly set. In addition, when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined during the first time-shortened period, (3a) the first time-shortened period ends and a third time-shortened period is newly set, (3b) the first time-shortened period continues, or (3c) if the number of time-shortened periods when the third time-shortened period is set is greater than the number of time-shortened periods remaining in the first time-shortened period, the first time-shortened period ends and a third time-shortened period is newly set.

In addition, when a jackpot pattern that is set to set a time-saving game state during the second time-saving is determined, (4a) the second time-saving is terminated, and a new first time-saving state is set after the special game ends. In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes during the second time-saving (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for which time-saving is activated, any of the following controls (5a) to (5b) may be adopted: (5a) the second time-saving state is terminated, and a new second time-saving state is set, or (5b) the second time-saving state is continued. In addition, when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined during the second time-shortened period, (6a) the second time-shortened period ends and a third time-shortened period is newly set, (6b) the second time-shortened period continues, or (6c) if the number of time-shortened periods when the third time-shortened period is set is greater than the number of time-shortened periods remaining in the second time-shortened period, the second time-shortened period ends and a third time-shortened period is newly set. Any of the following controls (6a) to (6c) may be adopted.

When a jackpot pattern that is set to set a time-saving game state during the third time-saving period is determined, (7a) the third time-saving period may be ended, and a new first time-saving period may be set after the special game ends. When the number of times that the special pattern changes during the third time-saving period (the number of times that the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times that time-saving periods are activated LN, (8a) the third time-saving period may be ended, and a new second time-saving period may be set, (8b) the third time-saving period may be continued, or (8c) if the number of times that time-saving periods are set when the second time-saving period is set is greater than the number of times that time-saving periods remain in the third time-saving period, any of the following controls (8a) to (8c) may be adopted. In addition, when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state during the third time reduction (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined, (9a) the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set, (9b) the third time reduction is continued, or (9c) if the number of time reductions when the third time reduction is set is greater than the number of time reductions remaining in the third time reduction, the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set, any of the following controls (9a) to (9c) may be adopted.

In addition, when various decisions are made in the first, second, and third time reductions described above, control may be applied in an appropriate combination based on the above-mentioned contents.
For example, the following control may be performed.
During a normal game state (low probability game state, non-time-saving game state), when a big win pattern determined to set a time-saving game state is determined, a first time-saving state is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time-saving state, a second time-saving state is set, and when a pattern determined to set a time-saving game state (the above-mentioned time-saving pattern, a time-saving winning pattern, a small win pattern determined to set a time-saving game state, a losing pattern determined to set a time-saving game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-saving state is set.
During the first time reduction, when a big win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the first time reduction is terminated and a new first time reduction is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time reduction, the first time reduction is continued without setting a second time reduction, and when a pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the first time reduction is continued without setting a third time reduction.
During the second time reduction, when a big win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the second time reduction is terminated and a new first time reduction is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time reduction, the second time reduction currently set is continued without setting a new second time reduction, and when a pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the second time reduction is continued without setting a third time reduction.
During the third time reduction, when a jackpot pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined, the third time reduction is terminated and a new first time reduction is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for which time reduction is activated, the third time reduction is terminated and a new second time reduction is set, and when a pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, a time-shortened winning pattern, a small win pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, the currently set third time reduction is continued without setting a new third time reduction.
When a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state is determined during a high-probability time-shortened game state or a high-probability non-time-shortened game state (i.e., during a high-probability game state), a first time-shortened game is set after the special game ends, and when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time-shortened game, a second time-shortened game is not set, and when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, a time-shortened winning game pattern, a small win game pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, a losing game pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-shortened game is not set.
By doing so, the number of variations in the time-saving gaming state settings is increased, which can increase the interest of the player.

As described in (31) above, when a pachinko machine is provided with a second time-saving feature and a setting value associated with a setting related to the ball output is provided, the same number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature may be set regardless of which setting value is provided.
By doing this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the degree of advantage between each set value changes excessively due to the setting of the second time reduction.
Also, the main control board 100 may be set to count the number of times the special symbols change (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) to determine whether or not the time-saving activation count LN has been reached, and the counting may be always performed during a low-probability game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state) but not performed during a high-probability game state (high-probability non-time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). In other words, during a low-probability game state, the above-mentioned counting may always be performed regardless of whether or not the time-saving game state is set.
By doing this, the second time reduction can be reliably set only during a low probability game state.

In addition, the conditions for ending the second time-saving mode may be set to (10a) a big win, (10b) the sum of the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaching the number of time-saving times, (10c) the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaching a specific number, or (10d) the number of small wins reaching a predetermined number, and any one or more of (10a) to (10c) may be set.
For example, the following conditions can be set as the ending conditions for the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine, as jackpot symbols for which a time-saving game state is set, jackpot symbol XA1 (in a variable presentation, the first, second, and third stopping symbols are all "7") and jackpot symbol XA2 (in a variable presentation, the first, second, and third stopping symbols are all other than "7") are provided, and time-saving symbol JD1 (in a variable presentation, the first and second stopping symbols are the same odd number symbols other than "7", and the third stopping symbol is "7") is provided for which a time-saving game state is set, and when the number of times that the special symbols change (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times for time-saving activation LN (for example, 1000 times), it is possible to win a small prize in the win/lose lottery.
In this pachinko machine, the first time-saving period, which is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern XA1, is completed, can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total of the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 100 times (time-saving number of times), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 10 times (specific number of times), and when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 2 times (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the first time-saving period which is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern XA2 ends can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total of the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 50 times (time-saving number of times), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 4 times (specific number of times), and when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 1 time (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the second time-saving feature, which is set when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results of the win/lose lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving feature, can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total of the number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 600 times (number of times of time-saving feature), when the number of times of changes based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 50 times (specific number of times), and when the number of times a small jackpot is won reaches 10 times (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the third time-saving period, which is set by determining the time-saving pattern JD1, can be set to end when a jackpot is won, and can be set to end when the total of the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 60 times (time-saving number of times), when the number of fluctuations based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 reaches 8 times (specific number of times), and when the number of small jackpot wins reaches 3 times (predetermined number of times).
By doing so, it is possible to provide a wide variety of endings for the time-saving gaming state, thereby providing various gaming features.

In addition, if the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols during the second time reduction is set to be the same as that during the normal game state (non-time-reduction game state), it is necessary to set the above-mentioned probability of winning during the normal game state to a certain degree high in order to make it easier to maintain the second start winning hole 16 in an open state during the second time reduction. In this case, the movable piece 16b is structured to be able to protrude and retract from the game board 11, and when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole 16 by the movable piece 16b, allowing the ball to enter the second start winning hole 16, while when the movable piece 16b is submerged in the game board 11, the game ball is not guided to the second start winning hole 16 and does not enter the second start winning hole 16. In addition, by setting the protruding time (opening time) of the movable piece 16b to be shorter during the normal game state than during the second time reduction, if a winning regular pattern is drawn during the normal game state, the rate at which the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 can be reduced compared to when a winning regular pattern is drawn during the second time reduction.

Also, the number of times that the second time-saving can be set between winning a jackpot and the next winning jackpot may be set only once. Specifically, after winning a jackpot (end of special play), the number of times that the special symbols fluctuate (the number of times that the winning/losing lottery results are derived) reaches a predetermined number of times that the time-saving activation LN is reached, and the second time-saving is set. Even if the number of times that the special symbols fluctuate (the number of times that the winning/losing lottery results are derived) reaches the number of times that the time-saving activation LN is reached again without winning a jackpot, the second time-saving may not be set.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game state from being set excessively, leading to an excessive increase in gambling tendency.

Also, as described above, during a low-probability game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the main control board 100 counts the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results for the win/lose lottery are derived) to determine whether or not the time-saving activation count LN has been reached, but after a jackpot is won (end of special game), the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results for the win/lose lottery are derived) has reached the time-saving activation count LN, and the second time-saving is set, and the above-mentioned counting may be stopped.
In this way, the processing load on the main control board 100 can be reduced.

In addition, even if the first or second time reduction is set to continue without setting a third time reduction when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, the time-shortened winning pattern, the small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, the losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined during the first or second time reduction, the third time reduction may be set when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (the above-mentioned time-shortened game pattern, the time-shortened winning pattern, the small winning pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, the losing pattern determined to set a time-shortened game state, etc.) is determined based on the final win/loss lottery for the first or second time reduction (the win/loss lottery held immediately before the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results are derived for the win/loss lottery) reaches the number of time reductions).
By doing so, the continuity of the time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.
In addition, in the case where it is set as described above, when a pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state (such as the above-mentioned time-shortened pattern, time-shortened winning pattern, small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state, or losing pattern that is determined to set a time-shortened game state) is determined in the final win/loss lottery of the first or second time-shortened game (the win/loss lottery held immediately before the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery results for the win/loss lottery are derived) reaches the number of times the time-shortened game is played), the first or second time-shortened game may be ended upon the end of the change in the special pattern in the final round, and a non-time-shortened game state may be set, and after the non-time-shortened game state is set, a stopped display of the pattern that is determined to set the above-mentioned time-shortened game state may be displayed, and after the stopped display, the third time-shortened game may be set. In addition, in conjunction with the setting of the above-mentioned non-time-shortened play state, the transmission of an external signal (time-shortened signal) which is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine in the time-shortened play state and indicates that the machine is in a time-shortened play state may be terminated, and in conjunction with the setting of the above-mentioned third time-shortened play state, the external signal may be transmitted again.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably execute control over the termination of the time-saving game state and the new setting, and also to reliably notify the outside of the pachinko machine of the switch to the time-saving game state.

In addition, when a small prize is won by the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived from the win/lose lottery) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature, it is possible to set it so that both a small prize game based on the small prize win and a second time-saving feature is set by the number of times the special pattern changes reaching the number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature.
Furthermore, when set in this manner, the second time reduction may be set at any of the following times: (i) from when a small win is won to when the small win pattern is stopped and displayed and the small win game begins; (ii) from the start to the end of the small win game; or (iii) after the end of the small win game.
By doing this, when the winning of a small prize and the establishment of the condition for setting the second time-saving mode coincide with each other, the timing for setting the second time-saving mode becomes more varied, so that it is possible to provide a more varied gameplay.

In addition, when the second time reduction and the third time reduction are installed, the second time reduction and the third time reduction may be set to have the same advantageous degree (i.e., the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 may all be set to be the same), or the advantageous degrees may be set to be different (one or more of the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 may be set to be different). For example, the second time reduction may be set to have a higher advantageous degree than the third time reduction (one or more of the following may be set: the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal pattern is high, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is short, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 is long).
By doing this, it is possible to provide a wide variety of advantageous degrees for the second and third time reductions, thereby increasing the interest of the player.
In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN to activate the time-saving feature and a pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state (the above-mentioned time-saving pattern, the time-saving winning pattern, the small winning pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state, the losing pattern that is determined to set a time-saving game state, etc.) is determined, the second time-saving feature may be set in priority to the third time-saving feature.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the second time reduction and the third time reduction overlap, the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(39) In addition, the first, second and third time reductions may also be installed in a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a simultaneous rotation machine) that is configured to simultaneously change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and change the special pattern based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (i.e., when both a hold based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 and a hold based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 are stored, so-called simultaneous rotation control is performed to process both holds simultaneously), and settings such as those described above in (1) to (38) may be performed.
In the case where the first time-saving, second time-saving, and third time-saving are installed in the simultaneous spinning machine, a pattern (the above-mentioned time-saving pattern, time-saving winning pattern, small winning pattern for setting the time-saving game state, losing pattern for setting the time-saving game state, etc.) for which a time-saving game state is set is determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, and during the variation of the special pattern based on the determination, the number of times the special pattern will change (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/losing lottery is derived) is determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the other. When the number of times the special pattern is changed based on the game ball entering either one of the above-mentioned boxes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature, a second time-saving feature is set because the number of times the special pattern is changed based on the game ball entering either one of the above-mentioned boxes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery is derived) has reached the number of times LN for activating the time-saving feature, and after the second time-saving feature is set, a stopped display of a specified pattern is performed to set a time-saving game state determined based on the game ball entering either one of the above-mentioned boxes, but the third time-saving feature may not be set.
In addition, when a pattern (the above-mentioned time-saving pattern, the time-saving winning pattern, the small winning pattern for which a time-saving game state is set, the losing pattern for which a time-saving game state is set, etc.) for which a time-saving game state is set based on the entry of a game ball into either the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16 is determined, and a jackpot pattern is determined (a jackpot is won) based on the entry of a game ball into either the other port during the variation of the special pattern based on the entry of a game ball into either the other port described above, a first time saving is set because the jackpot pattern was determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the other port described above during the variation of the special pattern based on the entry of a game ball into either the other port described above, and after the first time saving is set, a stopped display of a pattern for which a time-saving game state determined based on the entry of a game ball into either the other port described above is displayed, but a third time saving is not set.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the first time reduction or the second time reduction are met in the simultaneous rotation machine and the conditions for setting the third time reduction are also met in an overlapping manner, the first time reduction or the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(40) In addition, in the case where a time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot pattern for which it has been determined that a time-saving game state is to be set (i.e., when a first time-saving game state is set), during at least one of the fluctuation of the jackpot pattern (during the execution of the fluctuation presentation based on the determination of the jackpot pattern) and the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern, a time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game (for example, a period shorter than the longest fluctuation time or the period of the special game when the number of rounds of play is the smallest). For a period shorter than the time from start to finish (for example, 10 seconds), a display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit) may be displayed in a specified area (for example, the entire area of the display unit 21a) of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, and after the specified period has elapsed, a mark suggesting the game ball be shot toward the second game area 12b may continue to be displayed in an area smaller than the above-mentioned specified area (for example, the area in the upper right corner or the area in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a).
By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware that a time-saving game state will be set after the variable performance and special game have ended, and it is also possible to impress upon the player that the game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b after the variable performance and special game have ended.

In addition, when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery) reaches the time-saving activation count LN and a time-saving game state is set (i.e., when the second time-saving is set), during the change of the special pattern (while the change performance is being executed) at the time when the time-saving activation count LN is reached, a display instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit) may be displayed in a specific area (for example, an area about half the size of the display unit 21a) on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 for a period shorter than the above-mentioned specified period (for example, a period shorter than the shortest change time (for example, 2 seconds)), and after the period shorter than the above-mentioned specified period has elapsed, a mark suggesting the game ball be shot toward the second game area 12b may continue to be displayed in an area smaller than the above-mentioned specific area (for example, the area in the upper right corner or the area in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a).
By doing this, the player can be made aware that a time-saving game state will be set after the fluctuation presentation when the number of times the special pattern fluctuates reaches the time-saving activation number LN, and even if a short fluctuation time is determined as the fluctuation time at the above-mentioned point, the player can be made to feel that the game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b after the fluctuation presentation ends, without feeling any discomfort.
The above-mentioned predetermined area and the above-mentioned specific area may be the same area or different areas. The above-mentioned specific area may be a part of the above-mentioned predetermined area. The area in which a mark suggesting the launch of a game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed when the first time reduction is set, and the area in which a mark suggesting the launch of a game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed when the second time reduction is set may be the same area or different areas, or may be areas of different sizes. One area may be a part of the other area.

In addition, if a jackpot is won by the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result is derived from the win/lose lottery) reaches the number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN, and a jackpot pattern is determined that specifies that the time-saving game state will not be set, a second time-saving feature may be set after the special game based on the winning of the jackpot has ended.
By doing so, there are more opportunities for the time-saving gaming state to be set, which can increase the player's interest.
In addition, when a jackpot is won by the win/lose lottery at the time when the number of times the special pattern changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/lose lottery) reaches the number of times the time-saving feature is activated LN, and a jackpot pattern that is determined to set a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) is determined, after the special game based on the winning of the jackpot has ended, the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) based on the jackpot pattern may be set without setting a second time-saving feature.
By doing this, a more advantageous gaming state for the player is set after the special game ends, which can increase the player's interest.

(41) In the above embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot count condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaching a predetermined number) is met, the determination ratio of the longer variable time is increased compared to before the consecutive jackpot count condition is met, thereby reducing the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time). However, the control method by the main CPU 101 for reducing the number of special games executed per unit time is not limited to this. A specific example will be described below.
As mentioned above, consecutive jackpots refer to consecutive jackpots won in a normal game state, transitioning to at least one of a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state, without transitioning back to the normal game state.

(Specific Example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive big wins reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times, etc.), in the variation executed thereafter, (A) the determination ratio of the variation time longer than the variation time of the variation of the special symbol executed before may be set to be high. Also, in the special game executed thereafter, (B) an opening time longer than the opening time of the special game executed before may be set, (C) an ending time longer than the ending time of the special game executed before may be set, (D) an interval time longer than the interval time of the special game executed before may be set, or (E) an opening time longer than the opening time of the big prize opening 18 in the special game executed before may be set.

(Specific Example 2)
For example, when the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 3)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total number of rounds executed during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 4)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the jackpot pattern determined when the predetermined number of times is reached or in a jackpot after the predetermined number of times is reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds to be played during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and in the variations played thereafter, and in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and in the special game played thereafter.
(Specific Example 5)
For example, during consecutive jackpots, if the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times) and the jackpot pattern determined at the time of winning the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds executed during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set for the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations executed thereafter, and for the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and the special play executed thereafter.

(Specific Example 6)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a specified special game to the winning of the next jackpot during consecutive jackpots is a specific number (e.g., 10 times) or less, the fluctuations related to the winning of that jackpot and any subsequent fluctuations, as well as the special game based on the winning of that jackpot and any subsequent special games, may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 7)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a specified special game to the winning of the next jackpot during consecutive jackpots is a specific number (e.g., 10 times) or less, and the jackpot pattern determined when the next jackpot is won is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds played during a special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set for the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations played thereafter, and for the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game played thereafter.

(Specific Example 8)
For example, when the total number of winning balls paid out during successive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 balls), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Example 9)
For example, if the total number of winning balls paid out during successive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3,000 balls) and the jackpot pattern determined in the jackpot after the predetermined number has been reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds played during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and in the variations played thereafter, and in the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and in the special play played thereafter.

(Example 10)
For example, when the difference between the number of winning balls paid out during successive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1,500 balls), the variation and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Example 11)
For example, when the difference between the number of winning balls paid out during successive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1,500 balls), and the jackpot pattern determined in the jackpot after the predetermined number is reached is a specific pattern (such as a jackpot pattern set for a relatively large number of rounds played during special play (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in the variations related to the winning of the jackpot and in the variations played thereafter, and in the special play based on the winning of the jackpot and in the special play played thereafter.

(Specific Example 12)
For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined when a specific jackpot is won during consecutive jackpots is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.) is set), the fluctuations executed thereafter may be set as in (A) above, and the special games based on the winning of the jackpot and special games executed thereafter may be set as in (B) to (E) above.
(Specific Example 13)
For example, when the first special random number or the second special random number is stored, a pre-determination process is set to be executed before the start of fluctuation based on the first special random number or the second special random number, in which a win/lose lottery and various judgments regarding the determination of special patterns (determination of whether or not it will win a jackpot, determination of the type of special pattern to be determined, etc.) are performed for the first special random number or the second special random number, and if, during consecutive jackpots, the judgment result of the pre-determination process is a predetermined content (for example, the reserved numbers stored at the time the special game ends include one that will win the jackpot), the fluctuations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 14)
For example, when the total elapsed time during successive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 15 minutes), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).
(Specific Example 15)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total elapsed time during the consecutive jackpots is less than a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

(Specific Example 16)
For example, when the total execution time of special games during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes), the variable and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in accordance with (A) to (E).
(Example 17)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., three times) and the total execution time of special games during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes), the variations and special games executed thereafter may be set as described above in (A) to (E).

Even when set as above, it is possible to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) in the same way as in the above-mentioned embodiment. This makes it possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of situations in which a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, causing a sudden increase in the number of winning balls won by the player, and thus leading to extremely high levels of gambling.

The various conditions in the above specific examples 1 to 17 can also be set in combination with each other to the extent that no contradictions arise. Furthermore, when the various conditions are satisfied, the above settings (A) to (E) can be set alone or in combination.

Also, a counter (configured by a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of consecutive jackpots may be provided in the main control board 100, and whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots has reached a predetermined number may be determined based on the count value of the counter. Then, when the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, any one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (E) may be set.
In addition, since the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 during the high probability time-saving game state, the consecutive jackpots are mainly jackpots won based on the second special random number. Therefore, the above-mentioned counter may be set to count the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special random number, and to reset the count value of the counter when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number, and to determine that the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 is satisfied when the number of consecutive jackpots won based on the second special random number reaches a predetermined number. In other words, when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number, the consecutive jackpots may be treated as being interrupted, and the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 may be set not to be satisfied unless a jackpot is won based on the second special random number in succession.
When a jackpot is won based on the second special random number, it is more likely that a special game with a relatively larger number of game balls that can be won will be decided than when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number, and there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by the player will increase rapidly in a short period of time. When set as described above, only the jackpot based on the second special random number is subject to the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, so it is possible to prevent the above settings (A) to (E) from being made excessively.

In addition, when the various conditions in specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, when (A) regarding the variable time is set in combination with at least one of (B) to (E) regarding the various times during special play, after the various conditions are satisfied, both the variable time and the various times during special play will be longer than before the various conditions were satisfied, but the rate of change of the variable time may be set to be greater than the rate of change of the various times during special play.
For example, when the conditions in Specific Example 1 are satisfied, and (A) and (B) are set in combination, the setting may be such that before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time for the special pattern is likely to be 3 seconds or 6 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time for the special pattern is likely to be 13 seconds or 15 seconds (changing to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before the predetermined number is reached), and the setting may be such that before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during special game is 10 seconds, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the opening time during special game is 15 seconds (changing to 1.5 times the opening time before the predetermined number is reached).

Furthermore, when the various conditions in specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, when (A) regarding the fluctuation time is set, after the various conditions are satisfied, both the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation pattern will be longer than before the various conditions are satisfied, but the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation pattern may be set to be greater than the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern, or the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern may be set to be greater than the rate of change in the fluctuation time of the reach fluctuation pattern.
For example, when (A) is set when the condition in the specific example 2 is satisfied, before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 3 seconds or 6 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 13 seconds or 15 seconds (changes to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern, and before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 20 seconds or 30 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 180 seconds or 240 seconds (changes to 6 to 12 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) may be likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern.
In addition, when (A) is set when the conditions in specific example 8 are satisfied, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be 3 seconds or 6 seconds, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be 13 seconds or 15 seconds (changing to 2.5 to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) and before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be 20 seconds or 30 seconds, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a reach fluctuation pattern is likely to be 40 seconds or 45 seconds (changing to about 1.3 to 2.25 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number).
Also, when the various conditions in the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, by setting at least one of (B) to (E) related to the various times during the special game without setting (A) related to the variable time, the execution time of the special game (opening time, ending time, interval time, opening time of the large prize opening 18) may be lengthened although the variable time does not change after the various conditions are satisfied. Also, in such a case, for example, the opening time after the various conditions are satisfied may be set to be longer than other times after the conditions are satisfied (ending time, interval time, opening time of the large prize opening 18), or the rate of change of the opening time before and after the various conditions are satisfied may be set to be larger than the rate of change of other times.

In addition, when the various conditions in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the settings in the above-mentioned (A) to (E). For example, when various conditions are satisfied, in the normal symbol game executed thereafter, (F) the determination ratio of the change time longer than the change time of the normal symbol change executed before may be set to be higher, or (G) the opening time may be set to be shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 before.
Also, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, after the end of the subsequent special game, (H) the number of time-saving times may be set to be less than the number of time-saving times that was set after the end of the previous special game.
By setting it in this manner, the frequency with which game balls enter the second start winning port 16 decreases, and the opportunities for winning/losing lotteries also decrease, making it possible to reduce the number of special games played per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time).

Also, for example, when various conditions are satisfied, in a special game executed thereafter, (I) the large prize opening 18 may be set to open and close in a manner that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the opening than in a previous special game (for example, by repeating a 0.5 second opening and 1.0 second closing a predetermined number of times).
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. This makes it possible to suppress the number of prize balls acquired by a player even when a large number of special games are played in a short period of time, thereby appropriately preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player's gambling tendency becomes extremely high.

Also, for example, if various conditions are satisfied, when the special pattern changes thereafter, when both the (J) first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number are stored, the first special pattern random number may be processed in priority to the second special pattern random number.
In this way, when the jackpot is won based on the first special random number, the probability of deciding to play a special game with fewer rounds is higher than when the jackpot is won based on the second special random number, so the expected number of prize balls that can be won during the special game is reduced, and the expected number of total prize balls per unit time is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of prize balls that a player can win, even if a large number of special games are played in a short period of time, and therefore to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's gambling tendency becomes extremely high.

As with (A) to (E), the settings (F) to (J) may be set alone or in combination with one another, or may be set in combination with at least one of (A) to (E).
In addition, in the settings (A) to (G), when the various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the various times are lengthened, but the predetermined times may be lengthened while the other times are shortened. For example, when the various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the setting may be made so that the determination ratio of the variation time longer than the variation time of the variation of the special symbol executed before is high (setting (A)), while the ending time shorter than the ending time of the special game executed before is set (setting (C)).
In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the time between the start of fluctuation and the end of the special game becomes too long after the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, resulting in extreme hindrance to the player's profits.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, settings (A) to (E) are made, and when the various times are lengthened, the frequency of execution of specific effects may be set to be higher within the lengthened period.
For example, when the various conditions of the concrete examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, if the setting ((A)) is made so that the rate of determining a longer fluctuation time than the previously executed fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is high, when a long fluctuation time is determined, the frequency of execution of a suggestive effect (specific effect) showing the expectation of winning the jackpot in the fluctuation may be set to be high. Also, the frequency of execution of a special effect (specific effect) showing contents unrelated to the result of the winning/losing lottery may be set to be high.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, if an opening time longer than the opening time of a special game previously executed is set (setting (B)), or if an ending time longer than the ending time of a special game previously executed is set (setting (C)), the frequency of execution of a pre-reading effect (specific effect) suggesting that there is something among the pending balls stored at that time that may be determined to be a jackpot winning ball may be increased before the opening time or ending time has elapsed.
The degree of change in the frequency of execution of a specific effect is not particularly limited. For example, although a specific effect was not executed before the various conditions described above were satisfied, it may be set so that the specific effect is executed after the various conditions described above are satisfied, or although a specific effect was executed at a predetermined execution rate before the various conditions described above were satisfied, it may be set so that the specific effect is executed at a rate higher than the predetermined execution rate after the various conditions described above are satisfied.
In this way, as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's tendency to gamble becomes extremely high, while also preventing the player's interest from declining due to various times being longer.

In addition, when one or more of the settings (A) to (J) are made when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met, the settings may be released (i.e., restored to the settings before the various conditions described above were met) when a predetermined termination condition is met.
The specified termination conditions can be, for example, a specified number of changes (e.g., 30 times) due to the setting made after the various conditions described above are satisfied, a specified number of special games (e.g., three times) have been played (a specified number of jackpots have been won) due to the setting made after the various conditions described above are satisfied, or it has been determined that the consecutive jackpots have been interrupted (e.g., a jackpot pattern that will set the normal game state after the special game has ended has been determined, the normal game state has been set, a specified number of changes have occurred since the normal game state was set, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting for preventing a situation in which gambling becomes too intense from continuing for a long time, thereby preventing the player's interest from declining.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are met and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) are made, even if at least one of the time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state continues (i.e., when consecutive jackpots are occurring), if a specific condition is met (for example, when the jackpot pattern X2 associated with the execution of a special game in which the number of obtainable game balls is relatively large is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in succession), the above-mentioned setting may be released (i.e., the setting may be restored to the state before the various conditions above were met).
In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting for preventing a situation in which gambling becomes too intense from continuing for a long time, thereby preventing the player's interest from declining.

Furthermore, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, specific external information may be sent to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a device provided outside the pachinko machine P, such as a hall computer) in order to communicate the settings made based on this, and in order to notify that the above-mentioned settings have been made, a specific display (for example, displaying a specific mark image or a warning display such as "game progress time is being changed") may be made on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, or a lamp may be turned on in a specific manner.
In addition, when the various conditions of the concrete examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, history information indicating that fact may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency and period of settings for preventing situations in which gambling becomes high, which can be useful in developing a pachinko machine in which situations in which gambling becomes high are unlikely to occur.

In addition, the pachinko machine P is provided with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 114 in which the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are set to be different, and when a jackpot is won without satisfying the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17, after the end of the special game based on the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to a different fluctuation pattern table 114 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot being won.
Even when the settings are made in this manner, if a jackpot is won while the various conditions described above are satisfied and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) have been made, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined by referring to the common fluctuation pattern table 114, regardless of which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of the jackpot being won.
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined without satisfying the various conditions described above, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the first fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of the relatively long fluctuation time is set high after the special game based on the jackpot is finished, and when the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X2 is determined without satisfying the various conditions described above, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the second fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of the relatively short fluctuation time is set high after the special game based on the jackpot is finished. And, when it is set in this way, even when the jackpot is won and either the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined while satisfying the various conditions described above, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined by referring to the third fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of the longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation time that can be determined by the first fluctuation pattern table 114 is set high after the special game based on the jackpot is finished.

The pachinko machine P may also be provided with a variation pattern table 114 as described below. The variation pattern table 114 will be specifically described below. Note that, in this example, the winning of the time-saving award (determination of the time-saving symbol) is not taken into consideration, and the winning of the small prize is not determined in the winning/losing lottery, and when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the two big winning symbols, X1 and X2, and the losing symbol, Y2, are determined.
For example, as shown in Figures 59 to 60, there may be provided a table C which is referred to when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied during a high-probability time-saving game state, and tables D1, D2, and D3 which are referred to when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied during a high-probability time-saving game state and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) described above are made.

As shown in FIG. 59, according to table C, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special symbols, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 224, a fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "10 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C3H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "15 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds) is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D0H" associated with a "30-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 30 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a "60-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a "100-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 100 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D3H" associated with a "120-second fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 120 seconds) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), according to table D1, when a losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special symbols, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, a fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "3-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 13 to 25, a fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "5-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 26 to 50, a fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "50-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds) is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 51 to 150, a fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 225 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 200 seconds) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), according to table D2, when a losing pattern Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 24, a fluctuation pattern command "C4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "50-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 25 to 74, a fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 75 to 149, a fluctuation pattern command "C7H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "70-second fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 70 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 150 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150-second fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200-second fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), according to table D3, when a losing pattern Y2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current number of reserved second special patterns, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, a fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "60-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, a fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "100-second fluctuation" is determined, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174, a fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "150-second fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249, a fluctuation pattern command "D5H" associated with a fluctuation pattern of "200-second fluctuation" is determined.

Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 during a high probability time-saving game state when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied, the fluctuation pattern (i.e., the fluctuation time) is determined by referring to table C. Also, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 16 during a high probability time-saving game state when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the settings (A) to (J) described above are made, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to any one of the fluctuation pattern tables 114, table D1, table D2 or table D3.
In addition, when the various conditions of the specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied during a high probability time-saving game state and one or more of the settings of (A) to (J) above are performed, if a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the referenced variation pattern table 114 may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the referenced variation pattern table 115 may be switched from table D1 to table D2 to table D3 according to the number of consecutive big wins. Also, the referenced variation pattern table 114 may be switched from table D3 to table D2 to table D1 according to the number of variations.

(Other game features to which the time-saving game state setting is applied)
Next, we will explain other examples of gameplay that apply control to set the time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game. Note that the following will mainly explain the configuration and control that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment, and will omit explanations of similar configurations and controls unless necessary. Also, it is assumed that no setting value is provided for any of the pachinko machines P according to the following other application examples.
(Another Application Example 1)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not specifically shown, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, and the installed devices and components are substantially the same as those in the above-described embodiment.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, the game state is set to one of the following, similar to the above-mentioned embodiment: a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-shortened game state), a second low-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state), or a high-probability time-shortened game state (a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-shortened game state).
As in the above embodiment, during the normal game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and so long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. On the other hand, during the second low probability time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small win game, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and so long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the large winning hole 18 (see FIG. 3).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the first start winning hole 15, a jackpot pattern X1 is determined, and when a jackpot is won based on a game ball entering the second start winning hole 16, a jackpot pattern X2 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot during the normal game state is set to about 1/150, and the probability of winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving game state is set to about 1/110.
When the big win symbol X1 is determined, four rounds of play are executed during the special play based on the determination, and a predetermined number (e.g., one ball) of game balls cannot enter the specific area 57 during a specific round of play (e.g., three rounds), and the normal game state is set after the special play ends. Also, about 400 game balls can be acquired during the special play.
On the other hand, when the big win symbol X2 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special play based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in a specific round of play, and after the special play ends, a high probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 10,000 times) is set. Also, about 1,000 game balls can be acquired during the special play.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, the judgment of whether or not the time-saving grant is successful in the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the time-saving symbol in the case where the time-saving grant is successful are not performed as in the above-mentioned embodiment. Instead, as a losing symbol that can be determined when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 is a losing one, a losing symbol Z1 that is determined to set the second time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times that is set is a predetermined number (10,000 times in this application example)) and a losing symbol Z2 that is determined to not set the time-saving game state are provided. Then, in the normal game state, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15, the above-mentioned second time-saving game state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 during the normal game state, the game state thereafter transitions from the normal game state to the second low probability time-saving game state. In contrast, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the game state remains in the normal game state.
In addition, the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/500.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if a miss occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16, the miss symbol Z1 is not determined. Also, even if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 and a miss symbol Z1 is determined during a game state other than the normal game state (the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state), the second time-saving game state is not set. In other words, even if a miss symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15 in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state at that time is not changed, and the number of time-saving times 10,000 is not reset. Note that the remaining number of time-saving times at that time is updated (i.e., decremented by 1).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the upper limit for the number of consecutive high probability settings is set to 5 times. In this pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a high probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends, so that if the jackpot pattern X2 is determined five times in a row, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 1)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 1, as described above, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state), or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set and game play progresses.

When a player starts playing, the normal game state is often set. During this normal game state, as described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter the first start winning hole 15, but will not enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is held based on the game ball's entry into the first start winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 is determined. Then, if the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game without a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57 is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 61). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, during the normal game state, a high probability time-saving game state is not set through the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game.

Here, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 during the normal game state, the result of the winning/losing lottery will be a losing lottery and a losing symbol Z1 may be determined (the probability of determination is approximately 1/500). If a losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state is set to a second low-probability time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or going through a special game, and this second low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning/losing lottery has been derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot.

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is instructed to be shot (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter the second start winning hole 16, but will not enter the first start winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X2 is determined. If a jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to a high-probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the right hit is performed as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the jackpot will be won and the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 61). During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning hole 16 is much more likely to be maintained in an open state than during the normal game state, so the player can almost certainly win the next big jackpot while suppressing the loss of game balls as the game progresses, and transition to the high-probability time-saving game state takes place.

During the high probability time-saving game state, as in the second low probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball (right shot) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, a lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X2 is determined. If the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the special game ends is set to the high probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000. During the high probability time-saving game state, as in the second low probability time-saving game state, the player can almost certainly win the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls, and the high probability time-saving game state is set again.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high probability time-saving game state is set, a jackpot is won again during the game state, and the high probability time-saving game state is set again. Therefore, once the high probability time-saving game state is set, the jackpot pattern X2 can be determined continuously, and the high probability time-saving game state continues until the jackpot pattern X2 is determined five times in a row (until the number of consecutive probability-changing settings reaches the upper limit number). Then, when the jackpot pattern X2 is determined five times in a row, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to the normal game state. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high probability time-saving game state is set, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 is executed five times in a row without transitioning to the normal game state.

Here, for example, let us assume that the pachinko machine P is configured to set a high probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 game balls that can be acquired during a special game). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during a normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state is set, and similarly to the above, when the high probability time-saving game state is set, the jackpot symbol X2 can be determined consecutively without transitioning to the normal game state.
However, in the pachinko machine P configured in this way, since the high probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the determination of this jackpot pattern X1 is also counted as the number of consecutive probability setting times. Then, after the high probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, if the jackpot pattern X2 is determined four times in a row, the number of consecutive probability setting times reaches the upper limit number, and the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal game state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired from the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 (the transition to the high probability time-saving game state is determined) until the normal game state is set is 4400 (= 400 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 x 1 time + 1000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 x 4 times).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as described above, the high probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 during the first low probability time-saving game state via the second low probability time-saving game state which is set based on the determination of the losing pattern Z1 during the normal game state, so that the number of game balls that can be acquired from the time the jackpot pattern X2 is determined (the transition to the high probability time-saving game state is determined) until the normal game state is set is 5,000 (= 1,000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 x 5 times).

Also, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a jackpot is won based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning port 15, either a first jackpot pattern or a second jackpot pattern is determined, and when either jackpot pattern is determined, a high probability game state is always set, provided that the number of consecutive special mode settings has not reached the upper limit, but when the first jackpot pattern is determined, a time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, and when the second jackpot pattern is determined, a non-time-saving game state is set after the special game ends. In addition, in this pachinko machine P, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot pattern is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16, the machine is always set to a high probability game state, provided that the number of consecutive probability changes has not reached the upper limit, and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is won by a game ball entering the second start winning hole 16 is set to be greater than the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is won by a game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Furthermore, in this pachinko machine P, during a non-time-saving game state, game balls are shot toward the first game area 12a to enter the first start winning hole 15, and during a time-saving game state, game balls are shot toward the second game area 12b to enter the second start winning hole 16.

In a pachinko machine configured as described above, when the second jackpot pattern is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot 15, after the special game based on that determination ends, the machine transitions to a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, so the number of consecutive probability wins increases, but the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first start winning slot 15 continues. Then, when the first jackpot pattern is determined and the machine transitions to the time-saving game state, the number of consecutive probability wins has already increased, and by the time the number of consecutive probability wins reaches the upper limit, the number of times the player can win a jackpot based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning slot 16, which is advantageous for the player, will decrease, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In contrast, if the machine is set to transition to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific losing symbol or a small winning symbol that is not a big winning symbol, as in the pachinko machine according to Application Example 1, the number of consecutive high probability setting times does not increase before transitioning to the time-saving game state, and the machine transitions to the time-saving game state with the number of consecutive high probability setting times set at 0, so the unfavorable situation described above does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 1, instead of directly transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state in which a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern upon the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state, the game machine transitions to a low probability time-saving game state (second low probability time-saving game state) in which a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 based on the determination of a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) upon the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 during the normal game state, and then to a high probability time-saving game state based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot pattern upon the game ball entering the second start winning port 16.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot pattern that will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state is determined to the time when the high-probability time-saving game state ends, the player can earn game profits that can be awarded based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 (for example, the number of rounds during a special game that is executed based on winning a jackpot), which provides innovative gameplay that enhances the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the time-saving game state is set by determining a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) during the normal game state, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state may be set by determining a specific small winning pattern during the normal game state.
Also, similarly to the above-described embodiment, in the normal game state, when a losing pattern Z1 for which a time-saving game state is set is determined, the execution rate of a specific effect (such as a pre-reading effect, a reach development effect that gives the player high expectations during a variable effect, etc.) may be set to be higher than when a jackpot pattern X1 is determined.

(Another Application Example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to the second application example has almost the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to the first application example.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when a game ball enters the second start winning slot 16 and a jackpot pattern X2 is determined, a high probability time-saving game state in which the number of time-saving times is 100 is set after the special game based on the determination is finished. Since the probability of determining the jackpot pattern X2 is set to about 1/110, similar to the other application example 1, the next jackpot is not necessarily won during the high probability time-saving game state, and if the winning/losing lottery is performed 100 times without a jackpot being won, a normal game state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 2, the upper limit of the number of consecutive high-probability settings is not specifically set, and the high-probability time-saving game state continues until the condition for setting the low-probability time-saving game state is met (100 win/lose lotteries are held without winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the second application example 2, even if the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into not only the first start winning hole 15 but also the second start winning hole 16 is a losing ball, a losing symbol Z1 that is determined to set the second time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times that is set is a predetermined number (10,000 times in this application example)) or a losing symbol Z2 that is determined to not set the time-saving game state can be determined. And, even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16 in the normal game state, the above-mentioned second time-saving game state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16 during the normal game state, the game state thereafter transitions from the normal game state to the second low-probability time-saving game state. In contrast, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined in the normal game state, the game state remains in the normal game state.
In addition, the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/7.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16 in a game state other than the normal game state (the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state), the second time-saving game state is not reset. In other words, even if a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16 in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game state at that time is not changed, and the number of time-saving times of 10,000 is not reset. Note that the remaining number of time-saving times at that time is updated (i.e., decremented by 1).

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 2)
The flow of the game in the pachinko machine P of other application example 2, from the normal game state, through the second low-probability time-saving game state, to the high-probability time-saving game state, is the same as that of the pachinko machine P of other application example 1.
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 2, as described above, the number of time-saving times in the high-probability time-saving game state is set to 100, so that if the win/lose lottery is performed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Here, during the high probability time-saving game state, the game ball is constantly shot into the second game area 12b, and the game ball can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, it is highly likely that the second reserved number is the upper limit of 4 (i.e., the upper limit of four second special random numbers is reserved and stored). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, the second special random number is processed preferentially over the first special random number, so that the winning/losing lottery processing is performed for the maximum four second special random numbers reserved and stored at the time when the above-mentioned normal game state is set, before the first special random number reserved and stored.

After the normal game state is set, the shooting of game balls toward the first game area 12a is resumed, and the player aims to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole 15, again aiming to transition to a high probability time-saving game state.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, when the above-mentioned normal game state is set, if a losing symbol Z1 is determined in a winning/losing lottery based on a maximum of four second special random numbers reserved and stored, a second low-probability time-saving game state with 10,000 time-saving times is set, and after this, the high-probability time-saving game state is reset. That is, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the reserved second special random number at this point, and the game ball can enter the second start winning hole 16, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the ball, the game state is re-transferred to the high-probability time-saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to the other application example 2, when a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) is determined based on the second special pattern random number obtained by the entry of the game ball into the second start winning port 16 during the normal game state, the machine transitions to a second low-probability time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game, and then can transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.
This makes it possible to re-transition to the high probability time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game based on the second special chart random number that is reserved and stored at the time when the high probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, thereby providing an innovative gameplay that enhances the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, as in the other application example 1, the time-saving game state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal game state.

(Another Application Example 3)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3 is a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, which is configured so that a special game is executed when a big win is won or when a game ball enters a special area described below during a small win game based on a small win.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P in Other Application Example 3, and the devices and components installed on the game board 11, are the same as those in Other Application Example 1 and Other Application Example 2, except for the attacker device 17.
Although not specifically shown, the attacker device 17 has the same internal structure as the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, except that instead of the specific area 57 provided in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, it has a special area which has the same structure as the specific area 57 but a different function.

Then, similarly to the above-mentioned embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, during a special game based on winning a big prize or during a small prize game based on winning a small prize, the big prize opening 18 opens, and game balls can enter the big prize opening 18. However, during a special game, the allocating member 59 stays at the first position, and game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. In contrast, during a small prize game, the allocating member 59 stays at the second position, and game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area.
In other words, the game ball can enter the special area only during a small win game, so that the game ball enters the special area during a small win game based on a small win, and a special game is executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, other application example 1 and other application example 2, the game state after the special game ends is not set depending on whether or not a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined area (specific area 57) of the large prize opening 18 during the special game, but the above-mentioned game state is set according to the big prize pattern determined when the big prize is won and the small prize pattern determined when the small prize is won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, one of the following game states is set: a normal game state combining a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, a first low-probability time-saving game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state (the winning probability of a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment), or a second low-probability time-saving game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state (the winning probability of a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start winning port 16 are the same as in the above-mentioned embodiment).
As in the above embodiment, during the normal game state and the first low-probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and so long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small win game, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and so long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning hole 16, and enter the large winning hole 18 (see FIG. 3).

62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, a jackpot can be won, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state (while hitting from the left), a special game is executed based on the winning of a jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the game state. Also, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved number) is set to 2. However, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.
62, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described later has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game is completed.

62, in the case of a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15, a loss symbol Z1 is determined. When the loss symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the determination, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the determination.
In other words, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving settings are reset.

62, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, it is possible to win a big win or a small win, and when a big win is won, a big win symbol X2 is determined, and when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 is determined. That is, during the second low probability time-saving game state (during right hitting), a special game is executed through a small win game executed based on whether a big win is won (a big win symbol X2 is determined) or a small win is won (determination of a small win symbol Y1).
As shown in Fig. 62, the probability of winning a big prize when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the probability of winning a small prize when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to about 299/300 regardless of the game state. In other words, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the winning or losing lottery determines whether the game is a big prize or a small prize, and does not determine whether the game is a loss. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, a special game is always executed.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to 1. Note that the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X2 is determined and when the small win symbol Y1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be obtained.
62, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, if the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends, and if the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state, the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
In other words, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving settings are reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time-saving settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the big win symbol X1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, and when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, so that any of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-saving settings. And when these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit, so that after the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol or the small win symbol is finished and after the determination of the losing symbol, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 3)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, as described above, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), a first low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state), or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set and game play progresses.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. When a player starts playing, the normal game state is often set, and in the normal game state, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0 (i.e., there are 3 times remaining until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has a possibility of entering only the first start winning hole 15, so during this game state, a lottery is held to determine whether the game ball will enter the first start winning hole 15. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game based on this determination is ended is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 62 and 63).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0), the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (there are 2 remaining until the upper limit is reached).
In addition, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter only the second start winning hole 16, so during this game state, a winning/losing lottery is performed based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning hole 16. In this winning/losing lottery, as described above, a lottery result of either a big win (determination of the big win pattern X2) or a small win (determination of the small win pattern Y1) is derived. Then, when the big win pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIG. 62 and FIG. 63), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings increases by one (the number of times remaining until the upper limit is reached decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low probability time-saving game state is set, the special game is continuously executed until the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit number.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, and thereafter, if the jackpot pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1 is determined twice, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.
As described above, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to one, and during the fluctuation based on the determination of the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1, a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 and one second special random number is reserved and stored. Therefore, even if the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is determined once more based on the one second special random number reserved and stored at this point, and the special game based on the determination is executed. Note that, when the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is determined in the normal game state, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to the normal game state (see Figures 62 and 63), so after the above-mentioned special game is finished, the normal game state remains the same as before the special game is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the normal game state where the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0, the special games will be executed a total of two times (three times in total if the special games executed based on the jackpot or small jackpot based on the reserved second special chart random number are included) before the normal game state is set again.

(2) In the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), a jackpot is won and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set In contrast to (1), if a winning or losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15 in the normal game state results in a losing result and a losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), game balls are continuously shot into the first game area 12a. Then, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figs. 62 and 63), so that the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 2 (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is 1) based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1.

Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), if a big win pattern X1 is determined and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined once thereafter, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1, a special game will be executed once (a total of 2 times if the special game executed based on the jackpot or small jackpot based on the second special chart random number that has been reserved and stored) before the normal game state is set again.

(3) In the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two) a jackpot is won and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. In addition, when the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one) is set based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1 during the normal game state, if a losing symbol Z1 is further determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game state after the determination is reset to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figs. 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes two (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is one).
Then, in this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two), when a jackpot pattern X1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes three (the number of times remaining until the upper limit is reached is 0) based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1.
Then, even though the big winning pattern X1 is determined, the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit of three, so that after the special game based on the determination is finished, the second low-probability time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is forcibly set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 3, when a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the special game based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is not executed, and the normal game state is set again.

In addition, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the ball entering the first start winning hole 15 in the first low probability time-saving game state described above (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two), the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes three based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1 (the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes zero until the upper limit is reached), and after the determination, the normal game state is forcibly set (see Figures 62 and 63). Then, the above-mentioned steps (1) to (3) are repeated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set and the number of consecutive time-saving settings is updated based on the fact that a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game. Then, at the time when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of times remaining until the upper limit of the number of consecutive time-saving settings is reached changes according to the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state. As a result, the number of times that the special game is executed consecutively during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again) changes, making it possible to provide novel gameplay that enhances the player's interest.

It is not necessary to set it so that a big win or a small win will always occur when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, but it may be set so that a loss occurs with a predetermined probability.

(Another Application Example 4)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P relating to the other application example 4 is also a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine, and the configuration of the game board 11, the devices and components installed on the game board 11, the game states that are set, and the game area 12 from which game balls are shot out during each game state are all the same as those of the other application example 3.

64, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, as in the other application example 3, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, a jackpot can be won, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state (while hitting from the left), a special game is executed based on the winning of a jackpot (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the game state. Also, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 (the upper limit of the first reserved number) is set to 2. However, the upper limit of the number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X1 is determined, four rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 game balls can be obtained.
64, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described later has not reached the upper limit, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), a second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, a normal game state is set after the special game is completed.

64, in the case of a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15, a loss symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. The probability of determining the loss symbol Z1 is set to about 1/50, and the probability of determining the loss symbol Z2 is set to about 49/50.
When the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 10,000) is set after the determination, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the determination.
In other words, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving settings are reset.

In contrast, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined, the time-saving game state is not set. In other words, when a losing symbol Z2 is determined during a normal game state, the normal game state continues even after the determination, and when a losing symbol Z2 is determined during a first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

Also, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, it is possible to win a big win or a small win, and when a big win is won, the big win pattern X2 or X3 is determined, and when a small win is won, the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined. In other words, during the second low probability time-saving game state (during right hitting), a special game is executed through a small win game that is executed based on whether a big win is won (the big win pattern X2 or X3 is determined) or a small win is won (the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined).

As shown in FIG. 64, the probability of winning a big prize when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the probability of winning a small prize when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to approximately 299/300 regardless of the game state. In other words, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, the winning or losing lottery determines whether the big prize or small prize has been won, and does not determine whether the prize has been lost. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 3, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a special game is always executed.

64, the probability of winning the big win symbol X2 and the probability of winning the big win symbol X3 are both 1/2. Similarly, the probability of winning the small win symbol Y1 and the probability of winning the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to 2. However, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four rounds of play are executed during the special play based on that determination, and approximately 400 game balls can be won.

64, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving settings is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game is completed.
In other words, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving settings will be set (reset during the second low-probability time-saving game state).

In contrast, as shown in Fig. 64, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit, if the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends, and if the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state, the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
In other words, when a big win pattern X3 or a small win pattern Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the second low-probability time-saving game state and the number of time-saving settings are reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit number of consecutive time-saving settings is set to 3 times. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the big win symbol X1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, so that any of these determinations is counted as the number of consecutive time-saving settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time-saving settings will reach the upper limit, and after the special game based on the determination of the big win or small win symbol described above ends and the loss symbol described above is determined, the normal game state will be forcibly set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the upper limit of the number of reserved normal balls is set to 0, and no normal balls are reserved by the game ball passing through the gate 20. The second low probability time-saving game state set as described above ends at the start of the fluctuation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, and then the normal game state is set.
Here, for example, when a normal game state or a first low probability time-saving game state is switched to a second low probability time-saving game state through the execution of a special game, the second low probability time-saving game state may be set without the second special random number being reserved. In this case, the second start winning hole 16 is opened by the game ball passing through the gate 20, and when the first game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 while it is open and fluctuation is started based on the ball, the second low probability time-saving game state ends. However, since the second start winning hole 16 is still open at the start of the fluctuation, if a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 during this time, the second special random number will be reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.

As described above, since the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16 always results in a big win or a small win, after the special game based on the winning is completed, the second low-probability time-saving game state may be set with the second special random number reserved and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, a governing lottery (lottery result is a big win or a small win) based on the reserved and stored second special random number is performed and fluctuations begin, so the second low-probability time-saving game state ends immediately after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. Therefore, even if a game ball passes through the gate 20 after the above-mentioned special game is completed, since the second low-probability time-saving game state has already ended, the second start winning hole 16 is extremely unlikely to be maintained in an open state, and the game ball is not allowed to enter the second start winning hole 16.

When the winning/losing lottery is held based on the last reserved second special random number, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again with the second special random number not reserved. In this case, the same process as described above is carried out.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 4)
In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 4, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), a first low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state), or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set and game play progresses.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set. When a player starts playing, the normal game state is often set, and in the normal game state, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0 (i.e., there are 3 times remaining until the upper limit is reached).
During the normal game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has a possibility of entering only the first start winning hole 15, so during this game state, a winning/losing lottery is held based on the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the game state after the special game based on this determination is ended is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 64 and 65).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0), the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (there are 2 remaining until the upper limit is reached).
Furthermore, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot), and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball has the potential to enter only the second start winning port 16, so during this game state, a win/lose lottery is held based on the game ball's entry into the second start winning port 16.
In addition, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the second special random number is not reserved. Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second start winning hole 16 is opened, and a winning/losing lottery and a change are performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second start winning hole 16 during the opening, and further, based on the entry of the second and third game balls into the second start winning hole 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.

Then, in the above-mentioned win/lose lottery, as described above, one of the following lottery results is derived: the determination of the jackpot pattern X2 based on the winning of a jackpot, the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 based on the winning of a jackpot, the determination of the small prize pattern Y1 based on the winning of a small prize, or the determination of the small prize pattern Y2 based on the winning of a small prize. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, regardless of which of the above patterns is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings increases by one (the number of times remaining until the upper limit is reached decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, special games are played continuously until the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches the upper limit.

As described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, and therefore, if the jackpot pattern X2, jackpot pattern X3, small win pattern Y1, or small win pattern Y2 is subsequently determined twice, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends. Also, because the normal game state has been forcibly set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is reset to 0.

In addition, as described above, when the second low probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special random number used for the first winning/losing lottery and the variation, two second special random numbers are reserved and stored. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbols are determined twice and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a lottery is held based on the last one reserved second special random number, and either the big win symbol X2, the big win symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1, or the small win symbol Y2 is determined. Here, since the normal game state is set at the time of the lottery, if the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2). On the other hand, if the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is set (see Figures 64 and 65).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery has been conducted, the second special random number is no longer reserved and stored, and therefore when the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the big winning pattern X2 or the small winning pattern Y1, the second start winning port 16 is opened again, and a winning/losing lottery and fluctuation is conducted based on the entry of the first game ball into the second start winning port 16 while it is open, and further, based on the entry of the second or third game ball into the second start winning port 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.
As a result, the special game is continuously executed until any one of the big win symbol X2, the big win symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined twice again.

On the other hand, if the big win pattern X3 or the small win pattern Y2 is determined and the normal game state is set, the aim is to win another big win (determination of the big win pattern X2) from the normal game state and to transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state based on that win.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and the special game will continue to be played continuously unless the jackpot pattern X3 or the small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined based on the last remaining second special pattern random number when the game state is transitioned to the normal game state.
For example, if the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game is switched to the normal game state for the first time, a total of four special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2. If the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined when the game is switched to the normal game state for the first time, and the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game is switched to the normal game state for the second time, a total of seven special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2.

(2) In the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), a jackpot is won and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set In contrast to (1), if the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 in the normal game state results in a loss and a loss symbol Z1 is determined, the game state after the determination is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state (see Figures 64 and 65). Then, based on the determination of the loss symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), game balls are continuously shot into the first game area 12a. Then, when a jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15, the game state after the special game based on the determination is set to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figs. 64 and 65), so that the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 2 (the remaining number until the upper limit is reached is 1) based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1.
Also, as in the case of (1), after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first game ball enters the second start winning port 16, and based on this, a lottery for determining whether it is a win or a loss and a change are made, and further, based on the second and third game balls entering the second start winning port 16, the second special chart random numbers are reserved and stored up to the maximum number of two.

As described above, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 2 based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, and therefore, when the jackpot pattern X2, jackpot pattern X3, small win pattern Y1, or small win pattern Y2 is subsequently determined once, the normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on that determination ends. Also, because the normal game state has been forcibly set, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is reset to 0.

(a) In the normal game state that is forcibly set, when the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously reserved and stored. Here, when the second low probability time-saving game state is set as described above, in addition to the second special symbol random number used for the first win/loss lottery and the fluctuation, two second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored. Therefore, when the above-mentioned symbol is determined once and the normal game state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are reserved and stored.
Then, a lottery is held based on the second special random number that was reserved earlier among the two reserved ones, and one of the big win symbol X2, the big win symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1, or the small win symbol Y2 is determined. Here, since the normal game state is set at the time of the lottery, if the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again as in the case of (1) (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes 1 (the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 2).
At this point in time, since the remaining second special random number is stored in reserve, one of the above-mentioned patterns is determined based on this last second special random number, and the second low probability time-saving game state is set again (see Figures 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time-saving settings becomes two (one remaining until the upper limit is reached).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery has been conducted, the second special random number is no longer reserved and stored, and therefore when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of any of the above-mentioned patterns, the second start winning port 16 is opened again, and a winning/losing lottery and change is conducted based on the entry of the first game ball into the second start winning port 16 while it is open, and further, based on the entry of the second or third game ball into the second start winning port 16, the second special random number is reserved and stored up to the upper limit of two.
As described above, at this point, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two (one remaining until the upper limit is reached), so if the winning/losing lottery based on the first game ball entering the game determines whether the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small win symbol Y1, or the small win symbol Y2 is selected, the game will be forced to enter the normal game state, resulting in the same situation as described above.

(b) In the case where a big win pattern X3 or a small win pattern Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that was previously reserved and stored in the normal game state that has been forcibly set, in contrast to this, when the normal game state is forcibly set as described above and a big win pattern X3 or a small win pattern Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that was previously reserved and stored of the two that were reserved and stored at this point, the normal game state is set again based on that determination (see Figures 64 and 65).
At this point in time, since the remaining second special random number is stored in reserve, if the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is determined based on this last second special random number, the second low probability time-saving game state will be set again (see Figures 64 and 65), resulting in a situation similar to that of (1) above.
On the other hand, if the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state will continue to be set (see Figures 64 and 65), and in this case, the situation will be the same as (1) above.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and the special game will continue to be played continuously unless the jackpot pattern X3 or the small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined for either of the two second special random numbers remaining when the game state is transitioned to the normal game state.
For example, when the first and second second special random numbers reserved and stored when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special random numbers, a total of four special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2. Also, when the first and second special random numbers reserved and stored when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the big win symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special random number reserved and stored when the game is switched to the normal game state, a total of seven special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2.
In addition, when the game state is shifted to the normal game state for the first time, a jackpot pattern X2 or a small jackpot pattern Y1 is determined based on the first second special random number that was reserved and stored, when the game state is shifted to the normal game state for the second time, a jackpot pattern X2 or a small jackpot pattern Y1 is determined based on the first second special random number that was reserved and stored, and when the game state is shifted to the normal game state for the third time, a jackpot pattern X3 or a small jackpot pattern Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special random numbers that were reserved and stored. In this case, a total of 10 special games will be played, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 to the special game based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X3 or the small jackpot pattern Y2.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two) and a second low-probability time-saving game state is set As with the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 3, when a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, a special game based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is not executed, and the normal game state is set again.
Also, in the above-mentioned first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2), even if a losing pattern Z1 is determined based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15, after the determination, the normal game state is forcibly set (see Figures 64 and 65), and the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated, as in the pachinko machine P related to the other application example 3.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, the first low probability time-saving game state is set and the number of consecutive time-saving settings is updated based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) in the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game. Also, when the game transitions from the second low probability time-saving game state to the normal game state via a special game, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again when a predetermined jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X2) or small jackpot symbol (small jackpot symbol Y1) is determined based on the remaining second special symbol random number that was reserved and stored at that time. Then, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state has been set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, the number of times remaining until the upper limit of the number of consecutive time-saving settings is reached changes at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, and re-transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state is possible depending on the lottery result at the time of transition to the normal game state. Therefore, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times that the special game is executed consecutively changes, making it possible to provide novel gameplay that enhances the player's interest.

It is not necessary to set it so that when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, it will necessarily result in a big win or a small win, but it may be set so that it will result in a miss with a predetermined probability.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 and a miss is determined, a specific miss pattern (miss pattern Z1) that sets the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) may be determined.
In addition, when a gaming ball enters the first start winning port 15 and a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol for setting the normal gaming state may be determined.
In addition, rather than setting the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) based on the determination of a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15, a specific big win pattern or small win pattern for which the first time-saving game state is set by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 may be provided, and the first time-saving game state may be set based on the determination of the specific big win pattern or small win pattern.

(Other Application Example 5)
(Configuration and control overview)
The pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5 is also a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine. As shown in Fig. 66, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5 has a normal ball start opening 70 in which game balls can enter, which is provided in the lower center of the game area 12. Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the normal ball start winning opening 70.

In addition, an entrance device 80 through which the game ball can enter is provided at the lower left of the normal starting opening 70. As shown in FIG. 66 , this entry device 80 is equipped with an entrance 81 through which game balls can enter, an opening/closing door 82 (normally an electrically operated device) for opening and closing the entrance 81, a first flow-down passage 83 and a second flow-down passage 84 through which game balls that entered through the entrance 81 can flow down, a distribution member 85 that can be displaced to a first position or a second position and, when in the first position, distributes game balls that entered through the entrance 81 to the first flow-down passage 83 and, when in the second position, distributes game balls that entered through the entrance 81 to the second flow-down passage 84, a first gate 86 through which game balls flowing down the first flow-down passage 83 can pass, a second gate 87 through which game balls flowing down the second flow-down passage 84 can pass, and a discharge outlet (not specifically shown) that discharges game balls that have passed through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87 to the back of the game board 11.
66, a first start winning opening 15 having an openable/closeable door 90 and a second start winning opening 16 having an openable/closeable door 91 are arranged side by side in the center of the left part of the game area 12. Also, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as in the other application examples 3 and 4 is provided in the lower left part of the game area 12.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to this other application example 5, similarly to other application examples 3 and 4, either a normal game state, a first low-probability time-saving game state or a second low-probability time-saving game state is set, but in any game state, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (left hit).
When a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a enters the normal symbol start port 70, a lottery for a normal symbol is held, and if the lottery results in a winning combination, the opening and closing door 82 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the ball entrance port 81 of the entry device 80, and the sorting member 85 stops at the first or second position, so that the game ball that entered through the ball entrance port 81 is guided to the first flow-down passage 83 or the second flow-down passage 84. Which flow-down passage the game ball is guided to is predetermined according to the game state that has been set.

In addition, when the game ball guided to the first flow passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening and closing door 90 opens (the second start winning port 16 is opened) and the game ball can enter the second start winning port 16. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning port 16, the opening and closing door 90 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, the upper limit number of reserved first special chart random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 (the upper limit number of first reserved numbers) is set to one.
In addition, when the game ball guided to the second flow passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening and closing door 91 opens (the first start winning port 15 is opened) and the game ball can enter the second start winning port 16. Then, when two game balls enter the second start winning port 16, the opening and closing door 91 closes. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to one.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols during the non-time-saving game state (normal game state) is set to approximately 1/150, and the opening time for the opening/closing door 82 in the event of a winning is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). When a winning symbol is selected during the lottery for normal symbols during the non-time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 is adapted to stop at the second position, and as a result, the game ball entering through the ball entrance 81 passes through the second gate 87, opening the second start winning entrance 16.

As shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols during the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/2, and the opening time of the opening/closing door 82 in the event of a winning is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). When a winning normal symbol is selected during the first time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 is designed to stop at the first position, and as a result, the game ball that entered through the ball entry port 81 passes through the first gate 86, opening the first start winning port 15.

As shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery for normal symbols during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/1.1, and the opening time of the opening/closing door 82 in the event of a winning is 1.8 seconds (= 0.9 seconds x 2 times). When a winning normal symbol is selected during the second time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 is adapted to stay in the second position, and the game ball that entered through the ball entry port 81 passes through the second gate 87, opening the second start winning port 16.

67, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as in the other application examples 3 and 4, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, a jackpot can be won, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if a jackpot is lost, a loss symbol Z1 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state.
When the big win symbol X1 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), a second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 100 times) is set after the special game based on the determination ends.
In addition, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 100 times) is set after the determination. In contrast, when the game state at the time of the determination is the first low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set. In other words, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, it is possible to win a big win or a small win. When a big win is won, a big win pattern X2 or X3 is determined, when a small win is won, a small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, and when a miss is won, a miss pattern Z2 is determined.
When the game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a big win is won (the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or a special game is played through a small win game that is played based on the small win (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined).

67, the probability of winning a big prize when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to about 1/300 regardless of the game state, and the probability of winning a small prize when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 is set to about 149/300 regardless of the game state. In other words, the probability of winning a big prize or small prize and playing a special game when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16 is about 1/2.
67, the probability of winning the big win symbol X2 and the probability of winning the big win symbol X3 are both 1/2. Similarly, the probability of winning the small win symbol Y1 and the probability of winning the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
When the big win symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 rounds of play are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be obtained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when a big win pattern X2 or a small win pattern Y1 is determined, if the game state at the time of the determination is a normal game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends, and if the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, a normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends.
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 67, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends, regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state. In other words, when the big win symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state, the second low probability time-saving game state and the time-saving count are set (reset during the second low probability time-saving game state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when a losing symbol X2 is determined, if the game state at the time of the determination is a normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 999) is set after the determination. In contrast, when the game state at the time of the determination is a second low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set. In other words, if a losing symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state continues even after the determination.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 5)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 5, as described above, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state), a first low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a first time-saving game state), or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set and the game progresses.

Immediately after shipment from the factory or in the initial state after a reset, the normal game mode is set.
During the normal game state, game balls can enter the normal start winning opening 70, and a lottery for a normal pattern is performed based on the game ball entering the normal start winning opening 70. If a winning ball is selected in the lottery for the normal pattern, as described above, the opening and closing door 82 is opened, and the game ball that entered the entry device 70 can pass through the second gate 87, and the second start winning opening 16 is opened when the game ball passes through the gate. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning opening 16, the second start winning opening 16 is closed, and a winning or losing lottery is performed once based on the entered game ball.
In this winning/losing lottery, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the special game based on the determination is completed, the second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count 100 times) is set (see Figs. 67 and 68). On the other hand, if a loss occurs, the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and after the determination, the first low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count 999 times) is set (see Figs. 67 and 68).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as during the normal game state, game balls can enter the normal pattern start winning hole 70, and when a winning normal pattern is selected based on the game ball entering the normal pattern start winning hole 70, the opening and closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that entered the entry device 70 can pass through the second gate 87, and the second start winning hole 16 is opened when the game ball passes through the gate. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second start winning hole 16, the second start winning hole 16 is closed, and a winning or losing lottery is held once based on the entered game ball.

In this winning/losing lottery, if a big win is won, the big win pattern X2 or X3 is determined, if a small win is won, the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if a loss occurs, the loss pattern Z2 is determined (see Figs. 67 and 68). If the big win pattern X3 or the small win pattern Y2 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figs. 67 and 68). On the other hand, if the big win pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1 is determined, the normal game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends (see Figs. 67 and 68). If the loss pattern Z2 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state continues even after that determination (see Figs. 67 and 68).

In addition, since the number of time-saving times in the second low-probability time-saving game state is set to 100 times, if the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot, the second low-probability time-saving game state will end. However, since the second start winning hole 16 is frequently opened during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the probability of winning a jackpot or small jackpot in the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/2, the second low-probability time-saving game state will essentially continue until a jackpot or small jackpot is won again.
Then, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set through special games based on winning a big win or a small win, unless the big win pattern X2 or the small win pattern Y1 is determined in the win/lose lottery described above.

On the other hand, if a normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination of the big win pattern X2 or small win pattern Y1 is completed, a win/loss lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16 if the normal pattern lottery is a win, as described above. Then, if the big win pattern X1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state (time-saving count 100 times) is set again, and if a losing pattern Z1 is determined, the first low probability time-saving game state is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set As described above, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
During the first low probability time-saving game state, as during the normal game state and the second low probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal pattern start winning hole 70, but when a winning pattern is selected based on the game ball entering the normal pattern start winning hole 70, the opening and closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that entered the entry device 70 can pass through the first gate 86, and the first start winning hole 15 is opened when the game ball passes through the gate. Then, when two game balls enter the opened first start winning hole 15, the first start winning hole 15 is closed, and the winning/losing lottery and the variation are performed based on the game ball that entered first, and the first special pattern random number obtained based on the game ball that entered later is reserved and stored. Also, when the variation being performed ends, the winning/losing lottery and the variation are performed based on the reserved and stored first special pattern random number.

Then, in the win/lose lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning slot 15, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends (see Figures 67 and 68). The flow of the game after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set is the same as (1).
In contrast, in the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery, if the winning/losing symbol Z1 is determined as a losing symbol, the time-saving game state is not set, and the first low-probability time-saving game state continues as it is. Also, by performing one winning/losing lottery, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state is reduced by one.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter the first start winning hole 15 while it is open due to the winning decision in the lottery of the normal pattern, so the state in which one first special pattern random number is reserved and stored is maintained. Also, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, as described above, the number of time-saving times in the first low-probability time-saving game state is set to 999 times, which is an odd number. Then, if the winning/losing lottery is performed 999 times without winning the jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set (see FIG. 68), but at this point, one first special pattern random number is reserved and stored.
Then, a win/lose lottery is performed based on the first special random number stored in reserve at the time the normal game state is set, and if a big win is won and the big win symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed (see Figures 67 and 68). Furthermore, even if the above-mentioned win/lose lottery results in a loss and the loss symbol Z1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the determination (see Figures 67 and 68).
In other words, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, if the win/lose lottery is held 999 times without a jackpot being won, the game state thereafter will necessarily be set to the second low-probability time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 5, when the winning/losing lottery is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot in a predetermined game state (first low-probability time-saving game state), a specific game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) that is highly advantageous to the player is set, regardless of whether a specific winning/losing symbol (winning symbol X1) is determined in the next winning/losing lottery or a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined. This makes it possible to set an upper limit (so-called ceiling) on the number of winning/losing lotteries until the game transitions to the specific game state, and to provide a novel gameplay that enhances the player's interest.
In addition, when a miss occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning port 16, only the miss pattern Z2, which is determined to set the first low-probability time-saving game state (999 times of time-saving), is determined, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to determine the miss pattern Z1, which is determined to set the second low-probability time-saving game state (100 times of time-saving).

(Other Application Example 6)
(Configuration and control overview)
Although not shown in particular, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 is not a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine, but is configured so that a special game is executed only based on the winning of the jackpot. In addition, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, and the devices and members installed therein are almost the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiment, but the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the allocation member 59 are not provided in the big prize winning opening 18. Therefore, as described later, after the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot is finished, the game state is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern determined at the time of the winning of the jackpot.

In a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the game state is set to either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state) or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state), similar to the above-mentioned embodiment.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the normal game state is set in the initial state after shipment from the factory or after resetting, and during this normal game state, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a, and as long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can enter the first start winning hole 15. As will be described later, when a jackpot is won in the above-mentioned normal game state, a special game is executed based on the winning, and if a jackpot pattern X1 described later is determined when the jackpot is won, the game machine transitions to the second low probability time-saving game state after the above-mentioned special game ends.
In addition, when the game transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 described above, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20 and enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, the instruction to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b ends when the small win pattern Y1 described below is determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16, and all the second special pattern random numbers reserved and stored until the fluctuation of the small win pattern Y1 based on this determination ends become related to the determination of the small win pattern Y1, or when a jackpot is won based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, as described later, the jackpot pattern X1 can be determined even when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 and a jackpot is won, and the game machine transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state after the special game based on the determination is finished. And, when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16 and the game machine transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state, an instruction to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b is given in the same manner as described above, and the instruction ends at the same opportunity as described above.
Furthermore, during a special game based on winning a big prize, and during a small prize game based on winning a small prize, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot out in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second start winning port 16, and enter the big winning port 18.

As shown in Fig. 69, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, a jackpot can be won in a win/lose lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot pattern X1 or X2 can be determined. The probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to about 1/199 regardless of the game state, the probability of determining the jackpot pattern X1 is set to 1/4, and the probability of determining the jackpot pattern X2 is set to 3/4.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved first special random numbers (upper limit number of first reserved numbers) that can be stored when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 is set to 4, as in the above-mentioned embodiment. Note that the upper limit number of reserved first special random numbers is not limited to this.

When the big win symbols X1 and X2 are determined, eight rounds of play are executed during a special game based on the determination, and about 800 game balls can be obtained during the special game.
In addition, whenever the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving count is 100) is set at the end of the special game based on the determination. That is, the game transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state after the special game ends. On the other hand, whenever the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the normal game state is set at the end of the special game based on the determination. That is, the game transitions to the normal game state after the special game ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the number of consecutive time-saving settings is not set, and whenever a jackpot pattern X1 is determined, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on that determination ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 69, if the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 results in a losing result, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. This losing symbol Z1 does not specify that the second time-saving game state (i.e., time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times is 100) will be set. As mentioned above, since there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the first start winning hole 15 during the normal game state that exists before the big win symbol X1 is determined, if the losing symbol Z1 is determined during this normal game state, the normal game state will continue even after the determination.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, a big win or a small win can be won in a winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16, and when a big win is won, the above-mentioned big win pattern X1 or X2 can be determined, and when a small win is won, the small win pattern Y1 or Y2 can be determined. As in the case where a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the probability of winning a big win when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to about 1/199 regardless of the game state, the probability of determining the big win pattern X1 is set to 1/4, and the probability of determining the big win pattern X2 is set to 3/4. In addition, the probability of winning a small win when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to about 198/199 regardless of the game state, the probability of determining the small win pattern Y1 is set to 2/3, and the probability of determining the small win pattern Y2 is set to 1/3. In the pachinko machine P relating to this other application example 6, when a game ball enters the second start winning port 16, a win/lose lottery determines whether the ball has won a big prize or a small prize, and no loss is determined.
In addition, the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers (upper limit number of second reserved numbers) that can be stored when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 is set to 4. Note that the upper limit number of reserved second special random numbers is not limited to this.

As described above, the pachinko machine P relating to the other application example 6 is not a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine, so a special game is executed only when a big win is won by the win/lose lottery, and when a small win is won by the win/lose lottery, a small win game is executed, and a special game is not executed based on the small win game.
As shown in FIG. 69, during the small prize game which is executed based on the winning of the small prize (determination of the small prize patterns Y1, Y2), the large prize opening 18 is opened once for 1.8 seconds, and if 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 18 while it is open, the large prize opening 18 is closed.
In this way, in the small prize game of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the big prize opening 18 is open for 1.8 seconds, so as long as the game balls are continuously shot into the second game area 12b, it is possible to make the game balls enter the big prize opening 18. Then, depending on the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 during the small prize game, a maximum of about 150 game balls can be obtained.

Also, as shown in Fig. 69, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, it is determined that the second time-saving game state (i.e., time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times is 100) is set for the small win pattern Y2, and the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is set at the end of the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y2. In other words, when the small win pattern Y2 is determined, the game transitions to the second low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the small win game based on the determination.
In addition, it is not specified that the small win pattern Y1 is to be set to the second time-shortened game state, and the game state at the start of the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1 continues even after the small win game ends.

Also, although not specifically shown, in a pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 or the determination of the small jackpot pattern Y2 as described above is set to end when any of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special pattern has changed since the second time-saving game state was set (the number of times the lottery results are derived in the win/lose lottery) reaches 100, which is the number of time-saving times; a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery; or a small jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery.
Then, when the number of times the above-mentioned special pattern has changed reaches 100 times, which is the number of time-saving times, the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) ends and the normal game state is set when the change of the special pattern ends; when a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery, the change of the jackpot pattern determined based on the jackpot winning has ended; when a small jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery, the change of the small jackpot pattern determined based on the small jackpot winning has ended;

Here, as described above, when the second low probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is set after the special game ends based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1, the player is instructed to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot according to this instruction, the game ball can enter the second start winning hole 16. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, a win/lose lottery based on the ball entry determines whether the ball has won a jackpot or a small prize (see FIG. 69).
Then, after the second low probability time-saving game state is set as described above, if a small win is won based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16, the second low probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set when the variation of the small win pattern determined based on the winning of the small win ends, but if the small win pattern Y2 is determined based on the winning of the small win, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again when the small win game based on the determination ends. In other words, in this case, the normal game state is set when the variation of the small win pattern ends, so that the small win game is executed during the normal game state. And, although the second low probability time-saving game state ends once due to the setting of the normal game state described above, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again after the small win game ends.
In contrast, when the small win pattern Y1 is determined based on the above-mentioned small win, even if the small win game based on the determination ends, the second low probability time-saving game state is not set, and the normal game state at the start of the small win game continues. In other words, as in the above-mentioned case, the normal game state is set at the time when the variation of the small win pattern ends, and the small win game is executed during the normal game state, but in this case, the second low probability time-saving game state is not set again after the end of the small win game, and the normal game state continues.

Then, after the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the big win symbol X1 as described above, when all the reserved second special random numbers are related to the determination of the small win symbol Y1 until the change of the small win symbol Y1 based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1 is completed, the normal game state continues. During the normal game state, the second start winning hole 16 is almost closed as in the above embodiment, so that the game ball cannot be inserted into the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, after the above, even if the game ball continues to be shot toward the second game area 12b, the small win symbol Y2 cannot be determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, and the second low probability time-saving game state is not set again.
On the other hand, when at least one of the reserved second special random numbers is related to the determination of the small win pattern Y2, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again after the end of the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y2, as described above. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start winning hole 16 is likely to be maintained in an open state as in the above-mentioned embodiment, so that a game ball can be inserted into the second start winning hole 16. When a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, there is a possibility that a small win is won and the small win pattern Y2 is determined, and when the small win pattern Y2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again based on the determination. In other words, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1 as described above, the second low-probability time-saving game state can be set with the normal game state in between, as long as all of the second special random numbers reserved and stored until the end of the fluctuation of the small win pattern Y1 based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1 do not relate to the determination of the small win pattern Y1.

(Gameability of the Pachinko Machine P According to Another Application Example 6)
In the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, as described above, either a normal game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state) or a second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state combining a low-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set and the game progresses.

Immediately after shipment from the factory or in the initial state after a reset, the normal game mode is set, and this normal game mode is often set when a player starts playing.
During this normal game state, as described above, the ball is directed to be shot toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot), and as long as the ball is shot in accordance with this, the ball may enter the first start winning hole 15, but will not enter the second start winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is held based on the ball's entry into the first start winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined (see FIG. 69). If the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed, and if the jackpot pattern X2 is determined, the above-mentioned normal game state is set again after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIG. 69, FIG. 70). In other words, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, if the left hand shot is performed as instructed during the normal game state described above, a jackpot is won and the machine can transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state (see Figure 70).

After a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, transitioning to the second low probability time-saving game state described above, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be shot (hit to the right) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is shot in accordance with this, the game ball may enter the second start winning hole 16, but will not enter the first start winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16 to determine whether the game ball has won or lost, and if the game ball has won, the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined (see FIG. 69). As described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the above-mentioned normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIG. 69 and FIG. 70). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the right hit is performed as instructed after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the machine will either transition again to the second low-probability time-saving game state by winning a jackpot, or transition to the above-mentioned normal game state (see FIG. 70).

Here, in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, the probability of winning the big prize is set to about 1/199, and the probability of winning the small prize is set to about 198/199 (see FIG. 69). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, it is almost certain that the small prize will be won.
Then, as described above, after the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the big win symbol X1, all the second special random numbers reserved and stored until the change of the small win symbol Y1 based on the determination of the small win symbol Y1 is completed, or until the big win symbol X2 is determined by winning the big win based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, the second low probability time-saving game state is set with a normal game state in between, and the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b is instructed. Therefore, during the above-mentioned period, the small win game based on the winning of the small win is executed very frequently, and each time the small win game is executed, game balls (maximum about 150 balls) based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole 18 can be acquired. In other words, during the above-mentioned period, the game balls gradually increase without the execution of the special game based on the winning of the big win, which is an advantageous period for the player. In addition, the longer the above-mentioned period, the more times the small win game is executed, and therefore the more game balls are acquired.

In addition, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the big win pattern X1, if all the reserved second special random numbers are related to the determination of the small win pattern Y1 until the change of the small win pattern Y1 based on the determination of the small win pattern Y1 is completed, the normal game state continues without the second low-probability time-saving game state being set, and an instruction is given to shoot a game ball toward the first game area 12a. Therefore, after the above-mentioned situation occurs, the game ball is inserted into the first start winning hole 15, and the aim is again to determine the big win pattern X1 and to transition to the second low-probability time-saving game state based on that determination.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P relating to other application example 6, when a small win is won based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, but if the small win pattern Y2 is determined when the small win is won, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set at the time when the small win game based on that determination ends, and if the small win pattern Y1 is determined when the small win is won, the normal game state continues.
In other words, according to the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, as long as the second special pattern random number that determines the small win pattern Y2 is reserved and stored, the second low-probability time-saving game state will be set continuously, with normal game states in between, without the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game, thereby making it possible to provide innovative gameplay that enhances the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, during the period in which the above-mentioned second low-probability time-saving game state is continuously set, small prizes are won very frequently based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning port 16, and a small prize game is executed, so that the number of game balls can be increased by executing the small prize game without executing a special game.
In recent years, it has become possible to execute in parallel a winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into one of a plurality of starting winning ports and a variable display of a special symbol based on said lottery, and a winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into other starting winning ports and a variable display of a special symbol based on said lottery, and by setting the probability of winning a small prize high in the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into other starting winning ports, it is possible to frequently open a large winning port based on the execution of a small prize game, and further, a game state in which a large prize is won with a high probability and a start winning port which can be opened and closed is easily maintained in an open state. A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a small prize rush equipped machine) has been devised which is equipped with a high probability time-shortened game state in which the opening and closing start winning port is set so that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot, and a high probability non-time-shortened game state in which the opening and closing start winning port is set so that it is difficult to maintain the open state, and which is set so that a greater number of game balls can be won than in the high probability time-shortened game state by having game balls enter the other start winning port mentioned above during the high probability non-time-shortened game state to generate more small prize wins.The pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6 can provide gameplay equivalent to that of a small prize rush equipped machine.

Here, in a machine equipped with a small win rush, as described above, the probability of winning a small win is set high in the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into another start winning hole, so even in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, if a game ball is entered into another start winning hole, the small win will be frequently won and a small win game will be executed. For this reason, when a game ball enters another start winning hole in a game state other than the high probability non-time-saving game state, for example, the special pattern is changed over an extremely long change time (for example, 10 minutes, etc.), and the game is controlled to be extremely time-inefficient, thereby preventing the game from being played using the above-mentioned strategy.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, even if a game ball is shot into the second game area 12b during normal game mode to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole 16, which is set to have a high probability of winning a small prize in the win/lose lottery, the second start winning hole 16 remains almost closed, and the game ball does not enter the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, the winning of a small prize is not determined based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, since it is not necessary to incorporate or execute a control that inhibits the above-mentioned strategy, which is a concern in a small prize rush-equipped machine, it is possible to provide gameplay equivalent to that of a small prize rush-equipped machine while reducing the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 102.

In addition, in order to prevent the pachinko machine from becoming too gambling-prone, it is necessary to set the ratio of the number of paid-out game balls to the number of shot-out game balls (the so-called payout rate) not to exceed 100% during the time-saving game state (i.e., the number of owned game balls does not increase during the time-saving game state). Therefore, a small win rush-equipped machine is set so that small win games can be frequently executed not in the high-probability time-saving game state but in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, when the second low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set, the second low probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state (non-time-saving game state) is set when the variation of the small winning pattern based on the winning of the small winning is completed. Therefore, the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning is executed during the normal game state. In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, the small winning game can be executed frequently during the normal game state, and the gameplay equivalent to that of the small winning rush equipped machine can be provided while complying with the above-mentioned settings.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P relating to another application example 6, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when the variation of the small win pattern determined based on the winning of a small win ends, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again when the small win game based on the determination of the small win pattern Y2 ends, but the timing of the end and setting of the second low-probability time-saving game state is not limited to this.
For example, the second low-probability time-saving game state may end at any timing from when a small win is won in the win/lose lottery to when the small win game starts (the time when the small win is won, the time when the small win pattern starts to change, any time from the time when the small win pattern starts to change to the time when it ends, the time when the small win pattern stops changing and the stopped display time has elapsed, the time when the small win game starts, etc.).
In addition, the second low-probability time-saving game state may be set at any time after the large prize opening 18 is closed during a small prize game (the start of the ending process, any time from the start to the end of the ending process, the end of the ending process, any time from the closing of the large prize opening 18 to the elapse of the effective detection time during which the detection of the game ball by the large prize opening detection sensor 18a becomes effective, etc.).
Even in the above case, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, in the win/lose lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning port 16, either a big win or a small win is determined, and a loss is not determined, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole 16 is set to determine whether the big win, small win, or loss is won, and when the small win is won, only the small win symbol that is not set to set the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) is determined, and when the small win is lost, only the loss symbol that is set to set the time-saving game state is determined. In addition, in the above-mentioned winning/losing lottery, for example, both the probability of winning the small win and the probability of losing are set to about 99/199. Also, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends when the variation of the above-mentioned small win symbol determined based on the winning of the small win ends, and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set when the variation of the above-mentioned loss symbol determined based on the loss ends. In addition, the contents of the winning/losing lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning port 15, the jackpot pattern that may be determined in the event of a jackpot being won, and the settings of the game state based on the jackpot being won shall be the same as those of the pachinko machine P related to the other application example 6.
In this case, after the second low probability time-saving game state is set, the second low probability time-saving game state will be set continuously with the normal game state in between, without the winning of a jackpot or the execution of a special game, as long as the second special random numbers that will determine the above-mentioned losing symbols are reserved and stored. On the other hand, if all the reserved and stored second special random numbers will determine the above-mentioned small winning symbols, the normal game state will continue and the second low probability time-saving game state will not be set again.
Even when set as described above, the same effect as that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

(Example of presentation after the second low probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot pattern X1)
Next, an overview of the presentation after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, when the special game based on the determination of the big win pattern X1 ends, a start image (for example, a text image of "BATTLE RUSH START!") indicating that the second low probability time-saving game state has been set and a right-hit image (for example, a text image of "→→→ right hit") instructing to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b are displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 (see FIG. 71(a)). After that, a BATTLE image indicating that a game will be played against a predetermined character is displayed along with the variable display of the special pattern (see FIG. 71(b)), and if the small win has been won in the win/lose lottery, a result image (for example, a text image of "WIN!") indicating that the game has been won is displayed during the small win game executed after the variable display of the special pattern (small win pattern Y1, Y2) ends, and an image suggesting the number of game balls acquired (for example, "150 GET!") is displayed (see FIG. 71(c)). During the period in which the second low-probability time-saving game state is continuously set, the display of the BATTLE image and the display of the result image are repeatedly executed. Then, all the second special random numbers reserved and stored until the variation of the small winning pattern Y1 based on the determination of the small winning pattern Y1 is completed, and when the above-mentioned period ends, a BATTLE image and a result image are displayed in response to the variation of the last special pattern and the execution of the small winning game during the period, and then an end image (for example, a text image of "BATTLE RUSH END") indicating that the above-mentioned period has ended is displayed, and a left-hand shot image (for example, a text image of "←←← Left Shot") instructing to shoot a game ball toward the first game area 12a is displayed (see FIG. 71(d)). In addition, together with the end image and the left-hand shot image, the total number of game balls acquired during the above-mentioned period, the total number of game balls acquired from the setting of the second low-probability time-saving game state until the end of the above-mentioned period, etc. may be displayed.
In addition, if the player wins the jackpot in the winning/losing lottery, after the display of the special patterns (jackpot patterns X1, X2) has finished changing, a jackpot suggestion image (for example, a text image saying "BONUS!") indicating that the player has won the jackpot will be displayed (see FIG. 71(e)).

The various settings and controls in the above-described embodiment, modified examples, and other application examples may be configured in combination with each other within a range that does not cause contradictions.
Moreover, the first game area 12a in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the first area of the present invention. Moreover, the second game area 12b in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the second area of the present invention. Moreover, the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number in the above-mentioned embodiment correspond to the lottery information of the present invention. Moreover, the reserved storage means in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the storage means of the present invention. Moreover, the main CPU 101 that executes the winning/losing judgment process in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the determination means of the present invention. Moreover, the main CPU 101 that executes step 807 in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the pattern determination means of the present invention. Moreover, the special pattern in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the pattern of the present invention. Moreover, the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of steps 1304 to 1310 in the above-mentioned embodiment corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Moreover, the second low probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) in the other application example 6 corresponds to the time-saving game state of the present invention. Moreover, the normal game state in the other application example 6 corresponds to the non-time-saving game state of the present invention. Further, the small winning symbol Y2 in the other application example 6 corresponds to a specific symbol of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub-control board 301 Sub-CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A storage means capable of storing lottery information acquired based on the entry of a gaming ball into a first area or a second area into which the gaming ball can enter;
A determination means for determining whether or not a special game advantageous to a player can be executed based on the lottery information;
A symbol determination means capable of determining a symbol associated with a result of the determination;
and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a non-time-saving game state in which a game progresses mainly based on the entry of a game ball into the first area and the frequency of determination by the determination means is relatively low, and a time-saving game state in which a game progresses mainly based on the entry of a game ball into the second area and the frequency of determination by the determination means is relatively high,
The setting means is a gaming machine capable of setting the time-saving game state when a specific symbol associated with not executing the special game is determined,
The specific symbols that can be determined by the symbol determination means include a small win symbol that is associated with the execution of a small win game different from the special game,
When the small winning symbol is determined during the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state can be ended.
When the small win symbol is determined, the time-saving game state ends before the small win game based on the determination starts, and after the small win game based on the determination of the small win symbol by the lottery information stored based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second area is executed, if a specific condition is satisfied, the time-saving game state can be set .
When the lottery information for determining not to execute the special game associated with the specific symbol is stored in the storage means, a notification regarding the determination can be executed before a result of the determination based on the lottery information by the determination means is obtained,
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution time of the notification varies depending on the specific symbol .

Images